JP2018118180A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing motivation for a game by attracting attention of a player.SOLUTION: The game machine allows a player to play a game by using a game medium, the game machine including: a light guide plate on which a prescribed image is displayed due to a projection of light; light emission means capable of projecting light to the light guide plate; and driving means for moving the light guide plate in a prescribed direction on the basis of a progress of the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as “pachislot machine”) that performs a game using a gaming medium.

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win based on the game ball entering the starting port, and if the lottery result is a win, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state A gaming machine that generates a state is known. As this type of gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine that can give a predetermined gaming profit when a game ball passes a specific area in a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-103091 A

  Although the above gaming machine is configured to change the difficulty of entering a game ball in a specific area based on the lottery result, the expectation for a predetermined game profit is increased or decreased, but there is some abnormality or fraud If the manner of granting profits is different from what is assumed, there may be a disadvantage and distrust to the player or the game hall operating company. In order to solve such a problem, the present invention gives a disadvantage or distrust to a player or a playground management company in a gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined game profit when a game ball passes a specific area. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses this.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides:
A lottery is performed based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, and when the result of the lottery is a predetermined result, control is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. And a gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined gaming profit when the game medium passes a specific area in the special gaming state,
Special gaming state control means capable of controlling the special gaming state in a plurality of modes with different possibilities of passing game media through the specific area;
Peripheral control means for performing predetermined presentation control when a predetermined condition is established in the special gaming state;
With
The special gaming state control means controls the special gaming state in a difficult-to-pass manner in which a gaming medium is unlikely to pass through the specific area, and facilitates passage through which the gaming medium is likely to pass through the specific area. And controlling the special gaming state in an aspect,
When a lottery based on the game medium passing through the first start area of the start area is performed, the lottery based on the game medium passing through the second start area of the start area It is more likely that the special gaming state can be controlled in the difficult passage mode by the special gaming state control means than in the case where the special gaming state is performed, and the special gaming state can be controlled in the easy passage mode. Is low,
The specific period during which the game medium can pass through the specific area is set to a predetermined intermediate period excluding the start and end of the period controlled to the special gaming state,
The peripheral control means includes
When the game medium passes through the specific area in the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the difficult passage mode, the specific in the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the easy passage mode The first abnormality notification control for notifying the passage of the specific area in the first mode that is not performed when the game medium passes through the area is started based on the fact that the condition for starting the notification is satisfied,
In the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the easy passage mode when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the easy passage mode The second abnormality notification control for notifying the non-passage of the specific area in the second mode that is not performed when the game medium passes through the specific area and that can be distinguished from the first mode, satisfies the condition for starting the notification. Start with
While performing the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control, a lottery based on the passing of the game medium through the first starting area, or the gaming medium has passed through the second starting area. The special game state is newly controlled in the difficult passage mode or the easy passage mode while performing the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control as well as when a lottery based on the situation is performed. Even if it is a case, it is possible to continue to perform the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control being executed, and the identification of the newly controlled special gaming state in the midway period Even if a result regarding whether or not the game medium passes through the area is obtained and a new abnormality is specified based on the result, the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control being executed is cleared. Characterized in that to leave without.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which suppresses giving a disadvantage and distrust can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from back. It is a front view of a center character etc. in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role etc. from the right front. It is a rear view, such as a center actor. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the surface plate from the center accessory. It is a front view of the center object which removed the surface plate. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit from the center accessory. It is a front view of the center accessory which removed the surface plate and the attacker unit. It is a perspective view of the center role thing which removed the surface plate It is a rear view of the center object which removed the attacker unit. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a center accessory with an attacker unit removed. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the loser ball guide path cover from the center actor | unit from which the attacker unit was removed. It is the rear view which removed the lost ball guide way cover from the center character which removed the attacker unit. (A) is a front view of an attacker unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, and (c) is a perspective view thereof. It is a disassembled perspective view of an attacker unit. (A) is a front view of the attacker unit base, (b) is a rear view thereof, (c) is a perspective view seen from the right front side, and (d) is a perspective view seen from the right rear side. (A) is a front view of a taxiway distribution unit, (b) is the back view, (c) is the perspective view. (A) is a front view of the right attacker opening unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, (c) is a perspective view thereof, and (d) is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the right attacker opening unit viewed from the right front. FIG. 4E is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the right attacker opening unit as viewed from the right rear. The front view of a taxiway distribution unit, (b) is the sectional view on the AA line of (a). A side view of a taxiway distribution unit, (b) is a BB line sectional view of (a). It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from back. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 68. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 68. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 74. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 80. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 87 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 86. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every kind of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table which can be selected in a normal external disadvantageous game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225a) of the stop symbol in 1st production mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225b) of the stop symbol in 2nd production mode. (A) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (b) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (c) is a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating, (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. (A) is a table | surface which shows the jackpot expectation degree etc. when in the 1st production mode according to each production content series, respectively, (b) is a challenge bonus rush expectation degree in the 2nd production mode. It is a table | surface which shows each etc. according to each production content series. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "01H" in the 1st production mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "02H" in the 1st production mode. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board provided with a light-guide plate from the front. It is a front view of this game board. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a state in which a pair of left and right light guide plates are separated from each other on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display panel. It is a perspective view in the state where a pair of left and right light guide plates began to move toward the center of the liquid crystal display panel. It is a perspective view in the state where a pair of right and left light guide plates further moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display panel. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a state in which a pair of left and right light guide plates further move toward the center of the liquid crystal display panel and are closest to each other. It is the perspective view showing the inner surface of the perpendicular | vertical part of a guide apparatus, and the one part enlarged view. It is an assembly perspective view of the vertical part of a guide device, and the 1st light source device. It is a perspective view of the horizontal part of a guide apparatus. It is the assembly exploded perspective view of the drive device of a light guide plate and the left light guide plate seen from the liquid crystal display region side. It is the perspective view which looked at the right and left light-guide plate and the drive device guide apparatus from the back surface. It is the perspective view (illustration of a liquid crystal display device was abbreviate | omitted) which looked at the right and left light-guide plate and the drive device guide apparatus from the back surface. It is a timing chart for control of the production pattern of a light-guide plate. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the light guide plate is mounted | worn with the guide apparatus for moving a light guide plate back and forth in the front surface of a liquid crystal display area so that a movement in the front-back direction is possible. It is another perspective view which shows the state by which the light guide plate is mounted | worn with the guide apparatus for moving a light guide plate back and forth in the front surface of a liquid crystal display area so that a movement in the front-back direction is possible. It is another perspective view which shows the state by which the light guide plate is mounted | worn with the guide apparatus for moving a light guide plate back and forth in the front surface of a liquid crystal display area so that a movement in the front-back direction is possible. It is another perspective view which shows the state by which the light guide plate is mounted | worn with the guide apparatus for moving a light guide plate back and forth in the front surface of a liquid crystal display area so that a movement in the front-back direction is possible. It is a perspective view of a game board provided with a light guide plate. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning with a light-guide plate, a liquid crystal, and a light source device. It is the perspective view which looked at the movement light source device and the linear motion mechanism from the light-guide plate side. It is the perspective view which looked at the moving light source device and the linear motion mechanism from the outside of the light guide plate. It is an assembly exploded perspective view of a light guide plate, a light source device, and a linear motion mechanism. It is a front view of the light-guide plate which expresses a 1st design. It is a front view of the light-guide plate which expresses a 2nd pattern. It is a front view of the light-guide plate which exposes a 2nd design partially. It is a front view of the light-guide plate which exposes a 1st design partially. It is a front view of the light-guide plate which expresses a 2nd design partially continuously. It is a front view of the light-guide plate which displays a 1st design partially continuously. It is a front view of the light-guide plate which expresses the fusion | melting symbol of a 1st symbol and a 2nd symbol. It is another front view of the light-guide plate which expresses the fusion | melting symbol of a 1st symbol and a 2nd symbol. It is a sequence diagram explaining the flow of the effect using a light-guide plate. It is a table | surface which shows the type of jackpot by the displayed symbol. It is a table | surface which shows the open aspect of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the supplement of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit game state. It is a time chart near the 11th round in the case where any one of the time-saving symbols 2 to 6 is displayed. It is a time chart near the eleventh round when the time-saving symbol 1 is displayed. It is an example of a parameter management table. It is a flowchart of a parameter setting process. It is a flowchart of a game history information alerting | reporting form setting process. It is a flowchart of a game history information notification execution process. It is an example of the form by which the abnormality identification symbol is displayed on the color background on the screen of the symbol display device. It is an example of the alerting | reporting of the log | history information using the drivable rotating object. It is an example of the form of a history information list. It is another example of the form of a history information list. It is a further another example of the form of a history information list. It is a flowchart of the alerting | reporting process of a history information list.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 are guided downward. And an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200, and the payout unit base 801 A game ball which is attached to the lower end and is released from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 is guided forward and released from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank discharge port. Lower full tank path unit having a full tank guide path that guides the played game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the full ball receiving port 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board for controlling the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding, a flat gaming panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear side of the game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part and opened upward, and a main control board housed inside the main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 A table unit having a board box 1300 and a plurality of winning holes for receiving game balls that are attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and are driven into the game area 5a ( And a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and visible from the player side through the gaming panel 1100. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back after being disassembled as the main member.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction with a vertically long rectangle as shown in FIGS. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities of the game hall, An upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and opened on the front side, as shown in FIGS. And a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, etc., the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit body 542 and the box-shaped unit body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

  The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear after being decomposed into the main members. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit touch unit as seen from above and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from above with the button unit disassembled, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is the effect operation in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the door lower right effect unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the door lower right effect unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in the lower right door production unit of FIG. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the back. FIG. 42A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit in a state where the door lower right rotating body faces forward, and FIG. 42B is a front view of the door right lower rotating body facing rearward.

  FIG. 43A is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43B is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. In the upper plate body 212, the bottom surface is inclined so as to lower the right end as a whole. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 in the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 that is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220 </ b> B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from the upper side, A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220 </ b> C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231 g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B in an assembled state from the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, the production operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B etc. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and the touch unit 220B is lowered to the front support pin 231c. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends in the left and right directions, and the left and right centers bulge forward, and is formed in a shell shape that is open to the rear. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between a door lower rotary body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) to be described later. .

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. A heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  40 and 41, the rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotary body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decorative board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 42B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The entire production unit cover 300 is translucent in a container shape with the rear opened. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

  43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 43B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324 and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 against the biasing force of the spring member 324 in a position where the opening 321a is opened. It is equipped with a.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 212 so as to be slidable to the left and right. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 in a state where the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower plate 202 do not come out downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding protrusion 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projection 322a is released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface in the vicinity of the right end of the rendering operation unit 220 and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 receives a predetermined number of game balls. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion and the prepaid card are returned after being drawn. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting an effect by 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, the game operation area 5a is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the operation unit 200 entertained.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 200 includes the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain an operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 from the lower side, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

  According to the pachinko machine 1, the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are provided on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 bulging forward under the game area 5a. An effect (operation effect) using the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is presented to the player in accordance with the game state that changes by hitting a ball, and the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are displayed to the player during the effect. By operating, the player can be actively involved in the production, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained. And the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper side of the lower dish opening 261 (upper dish lower covering part 262) in the dish unit cover 260 provided with the touch panel 246 are within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by the player's hand. Since the thickness is set, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping the space between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish covering portion 262, so that the touch panel 246 is accurately operated. be able to.

  Specifically, since the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is a thickness within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by hand, for example, fingers excluding the thumb When the thumb is positioned on the upper side of the touch panel 246 in a state where it is in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the range of movement of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb. Is possible. In this state, since the fingers excluding the thumb are in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, it is possible to stabilize the thumb, and a desired position of the touch panel 246 can be touched by the thumb or on the touch panel 246. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved, and the touch panel 246 can be accurately operated. Further, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated with other fingers, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Accordingly, since the touch panel 246 is easy to operate, the touch panel 246 can be easily and accurately operated during the production using the touch panel 246. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm from the front end of the dish unit cover 260 to the rear, and is operated when the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 are gripped from the front end side and the touch panel 246 is operated. Since the touch panel 246 is arranged within the reach of the finger to be touched, the touch panel 246 can be operated with the finger stabilized, and the entertainment using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Furthermore, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is inclined so as to increase from the front side toward the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side so that the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the player operates the touch panel 246. It is possible to improve the properties, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side. Strength and rigidity of the Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the touch panel 246 and the dish unit cover 260 can be made difficult to break, and the game is interrupted by the breakage of the touch panel 246 and the like. Can be reduced.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is visible from the upper side through the touch panel 246 is provided, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to operate the touch panel 246. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can operate the touch panel 246 according to the content of the displayed image without knowing the operation method of the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, by displaying the effect image according to the game state, the player can be entertained by the effect image in addition to the operation effect of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since the touch panel 246 is arranged in the center of the left and right, the touch panel 246 is easy to see and the distance is the same from both sides of the player's left and right hands, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the hand that is easy for the player to use. The operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved by operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand. Therefore, when an effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be immediately recognized and operated, and it is possible to quickly respond to the operation effect, thereby suppressing the entertaining of the player and reducing the interest. can do.

  In addition, an upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player is provided, and in an operation effect presented according to the game state, in addition to a touch operation by the touch panel 246, a press operation by the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Therefore, various operation effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Further, since a part (guide passage portion 212a) of the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) for storing game balls along the rear side of the touch panel 246 is opened upward, for example, the guide passage of the upper plate 201 The finger except the thumb is locked to the portion 212a and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb, so that the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked to the guide passage portion 212a, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved. In addition, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved, and the touch panel 246 is operated by grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 or by locking a finger to the guide passage portion 212a. Since the finger can be stabilized and the operability can be improved, it is possible to select how to place the hand to stabilize the finger according to the player's habit and preference, and more diverse players It becomes possible corresponding, it may be easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine for a game.

  Subsequently, a configuration example of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. 47 is a perspective view of the gaming board 5 as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the gaming board 5 as seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 has an outer rail 6002 and an inner rail 6003, and a frame-shaped front component member 6001 that defines an outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are driven, and a front component member A gaming panel 1100 arranged so as to close the gaming area 5a on the rear side of 6001, a function display unit 6040 arranged below the front component member 6001 outside the gaming area 5a and on the left side of the outlet, and a gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 which is arranged at a substantially central portion and supported by the game panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game panel 1100 and a center on the rear side of the back unit 3000. It is attached so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the accessory (frame-shaped decorative body) 2300, and a predetermined effect image can be displayed. A liquid crystal display device 1400 of the output display means, a mainly provided.

  On the upper part of the center accessory 2300, a logo movable accessory 6200 simulating a logo is provided so as to be able to reciprocate counterclockwise around the right side toward the center of the game board in front view. On the right side, a zombie movable accessory 6201 that imitates the head of a person (zombie) is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat linearly from the right side to the center of the game panel 1100 in front view. A peripheral control board, which will be described later, controls the movable mode of the movable accessory in accordance with the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and mainly the back box 3001 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 1100 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, a predetermined movable accessory disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is provided. A board substrate holder 6023 is fixed below the back box 3001. The board substrate holder 6023 is provided with a main control board box 6024 for housing a main control board for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof. Further, a peripheral board box 6022 for storing a peripheral control board is attached to the back surface of the back box 3001.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the center character, FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the center character and the like as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the center character. 52 is an exploded perspective view in which the surface plate is disassembled from the center character, FIG. 53 is a front view of the center character with the surface plate removed, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view in which the attacker unit is disassembled from the center character. FIG. 55 is a front view of the center accessory with the surface plate and the attacker unit removed, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the center accessory with the surface plate removed. FIG. 57 is a rear view of the center accessory with the attacker unit removed, FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the center accessory with the attacker unit removed, and FIG. 59 is a center ball guide path cover from which the attacker unit has been removed. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled. FIG. 60 is a rear view of the center ball from which the attacker unit has been removed with the lose ball guide path cover removed. 61A is a front view of the attacker unit, FIG. 61B is a rear view thereof, FIG. 61C is a perspective view thereof, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit. 63A is a front view of the attacker unit base, FIG. 63B is a rear view thereof, FIG. 63C is a perspective view seen from the front right side thereof, and FIG. 63D is a perspective view seen from the rear right side thereof. is there. 64A is a front view of the taxiway distribution unit, FIG. 64B is a rear view thereof, and FIG. 64C is a perspective view thereof. 65 (a) is a front view of the right attacker opening unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, (c) is a perspective view thereof, and (d) is a main part of the right attacker opening unit viewed from the front right. An exploded perspective view, (e) is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the right attacker opening unit as viewed from the right rear. 66 (a) is a front view of the taxiway distribution unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of (a), FIG. 67 (a) is a side view of the taxiway distribution unit, (b) ) Is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the pachinko machine 1A, the first start port 2001 is provided at a position approximately at the center in the width direction of the board and slightly lower than the center in the height direction. A second start port 2008 is provided immediately below the first start port 2001. Furthermore, a lower prize winning port 2003 is provided immediately below the second starting port 2008. When the game ball enters the first start port 2001, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When the game ball enters the second start port 2008, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The first start port 2001 is open on the upper side, so that a game ball can always be received.

  The second starting port 2008 is in a state in which the space between the first starting port 2001 is closed by a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2008A and 2008B arranged in a substantially upright state on both the left and right sides. The pair of blade-like movable pieces at the second starting port 2008 is opened, and the game ball is in a state where it can be received at the second starting port 2008. The pair of movable pieces in the second starting port 2008 are pivotally supported at the lower end side, and are closed by rotating the upper end side in directions close to each other to close the game ball to the second starting port 2008. Is in a state where it is impossible to accept. As described above, the second starting port 2008 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces.

  The lower large prize opening can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing member 2003 capable of closing the opening. The opening / closing member is pivotally supported at the lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the lower major prize opening 2003 (for convenience of explanation, the lower major prize opening is referred to as “2003”) is closed. The ball can be made unacceptable, and when the upper side is rotated so as to move to the front side, the lower big prize opening 2003 is opened and the game ball can be accepted. In this way, the lower grand prize opening 2003 is a variable prize opening. The lower right of the game board is an area of a right attacker unit 6900 (see FIG. 61 and the like) described later. This is provided with a lower prize winning solenoid corresponding to the right prize winning solenoid 6923. By operating the lower major prize opening solenoid, the lower major prize opening 2003 can be opened and closed. Depending on the result of the special lottery (big win lottery) performed by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2008 (start winning prize) (the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit” ”), The lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid. As will be described later, in the big hit game, one or more rounds for opening and closing the right big prize opening 7000 are inserted between a plurality of predetermined rounds in which the lower big prize opening 2003 is opened. If the right big prize opening 7000 is opened and the game ball that has entered the right big prize opening can successfully enter the specific area in accordance with the opening of the specific area (the probability variation area 6770 described later), the gaming machine After the game is over, a predetermined gaming profit is generated such as changing the gaming state to a probability variation state until a certain number of variations. The gaming machine controls the timing of the opening of the special winning opening and the opening of the specific area based on the lottery result of the jackpot, so that the difficulty, frequency, probability, expectation degree of the game ball entering the specific area, By changing the possibility, the gaming profit given to the player is different.

  The center accessory 2700 shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, etc. is inserted from the front side into an opening that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the panel, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel. is there. The center accessory 2700 is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area.

  An upper stage 2701 is provided on the upper side of the lower position when the center accessory 2700 is viewed from the front, and a lower stage 2702 is provided below the upper stage 2701. A game ball guiding groove 2703 is formed at a substantially central position in the width direction of the lower stage 2702. In addition, a warp hole 2704 having an opening area through which a game ball can pass is formed at a position slightly below the center in the height direction of the left side of the center accessory 2700, and the game ball that has passed through the warp hole 2704 is The ball is discharged from the game ball discharge hole 2705. The game ball discharged from the game ball discharge hole 2705 is guided to the lower stage 2702.

  Most of the game balls guided to the lower stage 2702 swing in the left and right direction of the lower stage 2702 and fall downward from the game ball guide groove 2703 or its left and right recesses 2703A and 2703B. A first start port 2001 is disposed below the game ball guide groove 2703, and a game ball that has dropped from the game ball guide groove 2703 follows another path and reaches the first start port 2001. As a result, winning at the first starting port 2001 is facilitated.

  In addition, game balls that have dropped from the left and right recesses 2703A and 2703B of the game ball guide groove 2703 tend to be less likely to win the first starting port 2001 than game balls that have fallen from the game ball guide groove 2703. It becomes easier to win the first starting port 2001 than the game ball that has reached the first starting port 2001 by following the trajectory. For this reason, generally, a game ball guided to the lower stage 2702 through the warp hole 2704 is made easier to win the first starting port 2001 than a game ball that does not pass through the lower stage 2702. .

  Further, the upper stage 2701 may be hit by a game ball repelled by, for example, a nail (a so-called jump nail) provided around the first start port 2001. The game ball splashed by the jump nail may reach the lower stage A3. In this case as well, the game ball dropped from the game ball guide groove 2703 or its left and right recesses 2703A, 2703B is the first start port 2001. It is the same as when passing through the warp hole 2704 that makes it easy to win.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 and the like, a game ball guiding path unit 6500 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2700. The game ball guiding path unit 6500 is mainly made of a resin part product formed in the form of a hollow tube, and is attached to the game panel vertically on the right side of the game area.

  The start end 6501 of the game ball guiding path unit 6500 is configured to be opened at a position slightly lower than the uppermost portion of the right end portion of the game area, and above the start end 6501, an open area 2005b having a smaller area (see FIG. 50) is formed. A normal gate 2005a is formed in this open region. Many of the game balls that are hit right and bounce off the reflector 6010b (see FIG. 47) and attempt to flow down the right side of the game area enter the open area 2005b, pass through the normal gate 2005a, or pass through the normal gate 2005a. It is guided to the start end 6501 without being supplied, and is supplied from the start end 6501 into the game ball guiding path unit 6500. A straight portion 6502 is formed below the start end 6501 of the game ball guiding path unit 6500, and the game ball supplied from the start end 6501 is guided to the straight portion 6502.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the straight portion 6502 is formed in a straight line having a relatively long width and descending substantially vertically. Similarly to the front side of the game ball guiding path unit in the straight line portion 6502, a plurality of convex bodies 6502a having a semispherical cross section projecting toward the rear surface side are provided, and the rear surface portion also faces the front surface portion. A protruding body 6502b is provided. Since the convex body 6502a on the front surface side and the convex body 6502b on the rear surface side are formed in a zigzag shape, the game balls flowing down in the straight portion 6502 are sequentially arranged in a plurality of convex bodies arranged in a zigzag shape. Since the ball moves forward while making a short turn in contact with the ball, the falling speed of the game ball is reduced, and the behavior of the game ball is easily controlled. The height of the convex body in the front-rear direction is set in a range that does not impair the progress of the game ball passing through the game ball guiding path unit 6500. In order to adjust the falling speed of the game balls, the width in the direction of travel of the game balls of some of the convex bodies may be increased.

  An attacker unit accommodation area 6600 is formed in the lower area of the game area of the game ball guiding path unit 6500. A front plate 6601 is provided on the front surface of the attacker unit accommodation area 6600, and a space 6602 is formed on the back side of the front plate 6601 as shown in FIG. The surface plate 6601 is provided with a lamp member with a design, and an unillustrated attacker unit operation board for operating the right attacker unit 6900 (FIG. 54) is provided in a space located on the back side.

  A bent portion 6503 following the straight portion 6502 is formed above the attacker unit accommodation area 6600. The bent portion 6503 is formed so that the guide path is bent from the right side to the left side, and the inclination angle is about 30 °. Convex bodies similar to the straight line portion 6502 are provided at several locations on the downstream side. These convex bodies also reduce the moving speed of the game ball. Further, in the vicinity of the discharge portion at the left end of the bent portion 6503, the inclination angle is slightly increased.

  A gentle inclined portion 6504 is formed below the discharge portion of the bent portion 6503, as shown in FIGS. The gentle inclination portion 6504 has an inclination angle of about 5 °, and is set to an angle that makes it difficult for the game ball to stay while reducing the speed of the falling game ball. A right big prize opening 7000 with respect to the lower big prize opening 2003 is formed in the middle of the gentle slope portion 6504, and the big prize opening is closed by a right big prize opening opening / closing member 6933 (FIG. 53) in the right attacker unit 6900. It is. The right attacker unit 6900 will be further described later.

  A discharge portion 6505 is provided at the left end portion of the gently inclined portion 6504. The game ball that has passed through the discharge unit 6505 is discharged toward the lower prize winning port 2003. In the game ball guiding path unit 6500, the start end 6501, the straight portion 6502, the bent portion 6503, the gently inclined portion 6504, and the discharge portion 6505 all have a width that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. The game balls can pass with a margin, while the plurality of game balls cannot pass side by side. For this reason, the game balls introduced into the game ball guide path unit 6500 from the start end 6501 pass through the game ball guide path unit 6500 in the order of introduction into the game ball guide path unit 6500.

  Further, in the attacker unit accommodation area 6600, a drop guide path 6506 directed downward from a part of the lower surface thereof is formed below the special winning opening in the gently inclined portion 6504. The game ball that has passed through the drop guide path 6506 is guided to a guide path distribution member 6923 described later. The right big prize opening 7000 consisting of the upper opening in the drop guide path 6506 is normally closed by the big prize opening / closing member 6933, and the special prize opening / closing member 6933 moves when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the upper end opening of the drop guide path 6506 is opened so that the game ball can pass through the drop guide path 6506, and the game ball can be won in the big winning opening.

  The width of the right prize winning opening 7000 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. For this reason, when a game ball enters the right big prize opening 7000, two game balls are prevented from entering side by side, and the big prize opening opening / closing member 6933 is opened. The game balls that pass through the gentle slope portion 6504 are guided in order in the right big prize opening 7000.

  A game ball passing port 6604 is formed at a position below the right big prize winning port 7000 and corresponding to the lower end of the drop guide path 6506. The game mouth that has passed through the drop guide path 6506 is guided toward the back side of the attacker unit accommodation area through the game ball passage opening 6604.

  On the other hand, an upper outlet 6800 is provided at a position extending in the right direction in the gently inclined portion 6504. Since the upper out port 6800 is disposed above the gently inclined portion 6504, the game ball is structured not to easily enter the upper out port 6800. In addition, a protrusion is provided between the gently inclined portion 6504 and the upper out port 6800 from the lower side to the upper side, and it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the upper out port 6800 by this protrusion. It is said that.

  Further, on the back side of the position where the upper out port 6800 is formed in the attacker unit accommodation area 6600, an out ball guiding path 6801 extending downward is provided as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a lost ball guide path cover 6802 is attached to the front side of the out-ball guide path 6801. The lose ball guide path cover 6802 has a shape that follows the shape of the out ball guide path 6801. Since the out ball guide path 801 is covered with the lose ball guide path cover 6802, the game balls passing through the out ball guide path 6801 are prevented from protruding from the out ball guide path 801, and are reliably guided downward. Is done.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, a right attacker unit 6900 is provided on the back side of the attacker unit accommodation area 6600. As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the right attacker unit 6900 includes an attacker unit base 6910, a taxiway distribution unit 6920, and a right attacker release unit 6930.

  The attacker unit base 6910 is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the front. The attacker unit base 6910 has a horizontal portion having a certain thickness in the height direction and a vertical portion having a certain thickness in the width direction. In addition, a taxiway distribution unit 6920 is provided in the horizontal portion of the attacker unit base 6910, and a right attacker release unit 6930 is provided in the vertical portion.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63C, the attacker unit base 6910 is formed with a through hole 6940 at an upper position in the vertical portion. The through hole 6940 has a width slightly larger than the width of the right big prize opening / closing member 6933, and the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 can be taken in and out. In addition, a game ball introduction port 6950 into which a game ball can be introduced is formed in the vicinity of the boundary portion between the vertical portion of the attacker unit base 6910 and the horizontal portion. The game ball that has passed through the drop guide path 6506 and passed through the game ball passage port 6604 is guided to the back side of the attacker unit base 6910 through the game ball introduction port 6950.

  As shown in FIGS. 63B and 63D, a normal region 6960 and a probability variation region 6970 are arranged in parallel at the lower end portion of the attacker unit base 6910. Further, a distribution guiding path 6980 is formed on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910 and between the game ball introduction port 6950 and the normal area 6960 or the probability variation area 6970. The game balls introduced to the distribution guide path 6980 are distributed to the normal area 6960 or the probability variation area 6970. A normal region sensor 6991 and a probability variation region sensor 6992 are provided at the upper end of the normal region 6960 or the probability variation region 6970, respectively. A game ball guided to the normal area 6960 is detected by the normal area sensor 6991, and a game ball guided to the probability change area 6970 is detected by the probability change area sensor 6992.

  These normal area 6960 and probability variation area 6970 are arranged on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910, and more specifically, are arranged on the back side of the space 6602 in the attacker unit accommodation area 6600. Further, a normal area sensor 6991 for detecting a game ball guided to the normal area 6960 and a probability change area sensor 6992 for detecting a game ball guided to the probability change area 6970 are also provided on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910, and further on the attacker unit. It is disposed on the back side of the space 6602 in the storage area 6600. For this reason, detection members such as the normal area sensor 6991 and the probability variation area sensor 6992 are arranged at positions far from the player, specifically, at positions separated from the attacker unit accommodation area 6600 and the attacker unit base 6910 in the center character. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the guide path distribution unit 6920 includes a guide path distribution solenoid housing case 6921 and a guide path distribution solenoid 6922. The taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 is disposed on the back side of the taxiway distribution unit 6920 and is accommodated in the taxiway distribution solenoid accommodation case 6921.

  The taxiway distribution unit 6920 includes a taxiway distribution member 6923. As shown in FIG. 63, the guide path distribution member 6923 is disposed in the distribution guide path 6980, and passes the game ball guided to the back side of the attacker unit base 6910 through the game ball introduction port 6950. The distribution is made to the normal area 6960 or the probability variation area 6970.

  The guideway distribution member 6923 is connected to a guideway distribution solenoid 6922 via a link mechanism (not shown), and the position of the guideway distribution member 6923 changes by operating the guideway distribution solenoid 6922. . Here, when the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the standing state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the game balls introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 are distributed to the normal area 6960. In addition, when the guide path distributing member 6923 tilts to the left from the state shown in FIG. 67B to close the normal area 6960, the game introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 The sphere is distributed to a probability variation area 6970.

  When the guide path distribution member 6923 is in the standing state, the guide path distribution member 6923 stands in a region outside the region from the distribution guide path 6980 to the normal region 6960. The game ball is guided to the probability changing area 6970 by entering the area from 6980 to the normal area 6960. For this reason, the guideway distribution member 6923 in the standing state is arranged at a position where a game ball that passes through the distribution guideway 6980 and reaches the normal area 6960 is not touched.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the right attacker opening unit 6930 includes a right big prize opening solenoid accommodating case 6931 and a right big prize winning solenoid 6932. Of these, the right big prize opening solenoid accommodation case 6931 includes a right big prize opening solenoid accommodation case upper part 6934 and a right big prize opening solenoid accommodation case lower part 6935. The right big prize opening solenoid 6932 is disposed on the back side of the right attacker opening unit 6930 and is accommodated in the right big prize opening solenoid accommodation case 6931.

  The right attacker opening unit 6930 includes a right big prize opening opening / closing member 6933. As shown in FIG. 66, the right big prize opening opening / closing member 6933 can project to the front side of the right attacker unit 6900 through the through hole 6940. When the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 protrudes, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 is substantially flush with the lower surface of the gently inclined portion 6504 in the game ball guiding path unit 6500. Has been.

  For this reason, when the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 protrudes and closes the right big prize opening 7000, the game ball passing through the gently inclined portion 6504 moves to the discharge portion 6505 as it is. On the other hand, when the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 is pulled in and the right big prize opening 7000 is opened, the game ball passing through the gentle slope portion 6504 passes through the right big prize opening 7000 and goes to the drop guide path 6506. And move. Here, each of the gently inclined portion 6504, the discharge portion 6505, and the right big prize winning port 7000 is formed with a width that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. For this reason, the game ball moving in the gently inclined portion 6504 moves smoothly in an orderly manner with respect to both the discharge portion 6505 and the right big prize opening 7000. The game ball discharged from the discharge unit 6505 is discharged toward the second start port 2008. When the gaming state is the short-time state, by hitting the game ball to the right, the gaming ball discharged from the discharge unit 6505 is almost not entered into the first start port 2001 and is more than the non-time-short state. It becomes easy to enter the second start opening 2008 that is opened frequently.

  Further, the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 is connected to the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 via a link mechanism (not shown), and by operating the right big prize opening solenoid 6932, It can be taken in and out. Here, when the right big prize opening opening / closing member 6933 protrudes, the big prize opening in the gently inclined portion 6504 is closed, and the game ball is guided to the discharge portion 6505. On the other hand, when the right big prize opening opening / closing member 6933 is retracted, the big prize opening in the gentle inclined portion 6504 is opened, and the game ball is guided to the drop guiding path 6506 and further via the distribution guiding path 6980. To the normal region 6960 or the probability variation region 6970.

  The lower grand prize opening 2003 or the right big prize opening accepts game balls to the effective gate 6010n (see FIG. 55) after the condition device is activated when the result of the special lottery is “big hit (special hit)”. It is possible to open and close by driving the attacker solenoid on the condition that there is. The effective gate is a special gate for enabling the continuous object operating device after the condition device is operated. The effective gate is prepared so that the pachinko machine 1 has a function capable of delaying the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device operates when the jackpot is won. The effective gate 6010n is set near the end of the straight line portion 6502. An effect gate 6011 is formed at the starting end of the straight line portion 6502. When the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, the passing information of the game ball is supplied to the peripheral control board (or the main control board), and the peripheral control board triggers the right hand of the game ball when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011. The predetermined effect information of the effect device including the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed in the gaming state to be enabled. A game ball that passes through the straight line portion 6502 can gain time from passing through the effect gate 6011 to passing through the effective gate 6010n, as its falling speed is relaxed. Therefore, since the peripheral control board can have a margin for the time required for the production in the liquid crystal display device or the like, an effective production can be provided to the player.

  Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 68, and FIG. 70 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays an electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 68, and FIG. FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and performs the game operation. Various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are input to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor, and detection signals from various detection switches. A main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids such as a movable accessory, etc. And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A start port switch 3022 for detecting game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2008 (generically referring to the first start port switch and the second start port switch), and a general winning port. The detection signal from the general prize opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball that entered the ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. ing. Also, a gate switch 2352 that detects game balls that have passed through the normal gate 2005a and the effective gate 6010n (each switch is generically referred to), a count switch that detects a game ball that has entered the lower grand prize opening 2003, and the right Count switches for detecting game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 7000 (these switches are collectively referred to as 2110), and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 to detect fraud using a magnet. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. Although not shown in FIG. 68, the same applies to detection signals from the normal region sensor 6991 and the probability variation region sensor 6992.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and the start control solenoid (movable piece 2008a, b drive solenoid) 2105 and the attack solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, induction By outputting a drive signal to the road distribution solenoid 6922 and the right big prize opening solenoid 6932, or by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, Control output circuit 4 00ca through the panel relay terminal plate 4161 and the function display board 1191, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, A drive signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the start port switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, the count switch 2110 and the like. Uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2008, and the gate also passes frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 is also frequent. Occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352. Further, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2003, 7000 is opened and the game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. The same applies to the switches of the sensors 6991 and 699. On the other hand, detection by a general winning opening switch does not frequently occur in a general winning opening where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning a prize opening switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, is connected to the bus 4100ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 78). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 78). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 74). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 860a that also has various functions, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying. Further, the operation switch 860a having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a based on a detection signal output by operation. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling operations, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU4120a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 4120b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744, CR CR unit input / output circuit for exchanging various signals with unit 6 Is provided with a 4120e, a. The payout control MPU 4120a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program converts various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control I / O port 4120b. Receive serial data by serial method. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4120b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 860a, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command). In both cases, when a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later, and the information Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function does not reset the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A detection signal from a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path of the prize ball device and a count switch 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path of the prize ball device is firstly a prize ball device. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout case inner substrate and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device are first the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device, the substrate in the prize ball case, and the payout control input. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the circuit 4120b.

  The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame relative to the main body frame and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame relative to the outer frame is a payout control via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the MPU 4120a.

  The detection signal from the full switch 550 is first input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 192, the power supply board 851, and the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b in the serial data mode at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 860a. Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the main control board 4100.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a sends out various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, thereby giving out the payout without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. A drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor via the base plate in the prize ball case, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the pachinko gaming machine 1 By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, a drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b. To do.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). The fact that there is an abnormality in electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 4110) is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is clear” (specifically, Is based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and the payout rotator is difficult to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “counter switch error” (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the count switch 751 based on a detection signal from the count switch 751) is notified, and the number “ When “5” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is “full” (specifically, the game ball stored is full based on the detection signal from the full-tan switch 550), and the number “7” is displayed. When the number is “CR not connected”, the fact that the electrical connection is cut off from any part of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6 is notified, and when the number “9” is displayed In stock (with prize balls stock (unpaid coin)) "in the effect that (specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls not payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to an external terminal board via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of game balls, etc. and various information (game information, error contents related to payout operation of game balls or the fact that there was an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in. The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to cause the hall computer to Does not malfunction or break down, and there is an abnormality in the main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout etc. Therefore, a malfunction or failure may occur due to application of various voltages. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending apparatus connection terminal board such as a game ball. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the input / output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c, such as a game sphere. The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 74) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 4120a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 4120a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function.

  Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. The game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit 6 and the game ball are connected. The equal lending device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 is electrically connected). Between the board of CR unit 6 and gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and payout control board 4110, gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are supplied to the frequency display plate 365. .

  A switch 365a and a return switch 365b are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and a remaining frequency display 365c which is a segment display is mounted.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (the ball lending switch 365a is turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 365b is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three digit segment indicators, one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicator, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are connected from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball and the main door relay terminal board When input via the 880, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button is pressed and a ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has been started or ended, to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return switch 365 b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

  Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit that performs launch control by the launch solenoid of the hitting ball launcher and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid.

  The power control unit 855 operates the power switch 852 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. Power factor correction circuit 855b, smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improvement circuit 855b, and various direct currents for supplying power smoothed by smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates A power generation circuit 855d for generating a power supply.

  A launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid and ball feed control by ball feed mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a. The launch control circuit 857a detects an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a touch switch 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching. And a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launching (launching) of the game ball is forcibly stopped at the will of the player, via the handle relay terminal plate 192, Have been entered. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 857a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 4110. .

  The launch control circuit 857 a performs control to adjust a drive current for launching (launching) a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 and outputting the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 654.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. While performing drawing control and detecting control of the touch state of the touch panel 246, a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and a liquid crystal for controlling sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker provided in the door frame, and A sound control unit 4160, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time, and time information that specifies hour, minute, and second, and a body frame are provided. Rotate the knob to adjust the volume of music and sound effects that flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box and the speakers provided on the door frame. And a, and volume adjustment volume adjusted by.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data; Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have. In addition, the peripheral control unit 4150 controls the effect operation in response to the game ball passing information by the switch of the effect gate 6011 and the input information of the operation of the effect operation means such as the effect button 257.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with a backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board. The stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for transmitting various kinds of movable bodies provided in the game board 4 to the drive board 4170 is serialized for the motor drive board. Electric drive from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or an electric drive such as a dial drive motor provided on the door frame Door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board, and peripheral door relay terminal board The door side emission data for transmitting to the drive amplifier board or outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame is used for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. The data is transmitted from the serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit provided in the operation unit 400, and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate. Then, it is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

  From detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies (movable accessories) provided on the game board 5, and further from the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 Detection signal and detection signal from a push switch such as a production button are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 and the like, and the serialized detection data is serial transmission of the game board side. The circuit is input to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I's. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 The lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume, and is divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion. The pressed voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame are provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 3. Music and sound effects are played from the speakers. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1400 is rendered more powerful, or is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without being controlled, and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) with a program for the volume from mute to maximum volume. So that the it can be adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume to a low level, it is provided on the speaker and door frame accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 is reduced, the sound volume is high when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data for defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the luminance When the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When 12 months have already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to light up.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce that stores the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target that stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and the respective state effects. (For example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 68 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) is cleared to zero. The

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the camera can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are appended respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1 ms)” will be described later. As described above, each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. (Effect information (1 ms) and later-described effect backup information (1 ms) are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the lighting data, flashing signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC 41654a described later). Various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It has been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in a storage area, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided with various kinds of signals provided on the game board based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of the movable body is set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai. Is various information (for example, various detections provided in the operation unit) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit and the operation of the pressing operation unit based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit. Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit created based on the detection signal from the switch, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set in the storage area.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the Bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match, Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

  A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is that the power-on command from the main control board 4100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including power recovery due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (For example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 68 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) However, it is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

  Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. As shown in FIG. 71, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 to be performed has a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and a game board side liquid crystal. Sound display built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a for controlling drawing of the display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the screens displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data, and serialized sound An audio data transmission IC 4160c that transmits music, sound effects, and the like as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 3 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display an suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit (operation unit) of the operation unit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. Sprite data is extracted by extracting the side character data and the upper plate side character data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from the channel CH1 and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a detection signal corresponding to the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246, and when the detection signal is received, outputs it to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, so that the effect control program can output the contact surface of the touch panel 246 The contact state can be grasped. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the upper plate side The image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 is moved up from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 244. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. This is the data to generate above.

  The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set and the music accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode to be described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound to obtain audio as audio data. The data is output to the data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined performance sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value, so that it is accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. The volume that flows from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame is set to an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set sound adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually stored in the speaker box provided in the main body frame. Amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame, serializes the amplified effect sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and is used for the notification sound. Sub that adjusts the sound data of the notification sound built into the track and the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used The volume of the notification sound thus synthesized is actually applied to the main body frame by synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the volume value. Amplification is performed up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the provided speaker box and the speaker provided in the door frame, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 A brief explanation of the control for playing the notification sound to notify the store clerk, etc. is as follows. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound of the track in which this production sound is incorporated is set. The data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this synthesized production sound The volume of the sound volume and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume that flows from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame. Amplified to over volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. At this time, since the production sound is muted, although the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the production sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. doing. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, The volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the substrate volume is again set as the sub-volume value. Is set (at this time, if it is adjusted by moving to the setting mode by operating the dial operation part or the press operation part of the operation unit, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound), It flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 is caused. When the notification sound flows to notify the hall clerk etc., the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame, Since the silenced production sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame after a predetermined period of time has passed. When it disappears, the production sound does not start again from where the notification sound began to flow, but rather until the point in time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period of time elapses. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for growth.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

  When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speakers provided on the door frame.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data on the left and right sides, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the minus signal is affected by noise, the noise component on the plus signal and the noise component on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board into one left audio data. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the year, month, and day and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, or the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED luminance setting information when an LED type backlight is mounted on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to control the backlight ON / OFF or only ON when the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the year when the input date information is entered on the production line as the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted with an LED type, etc. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  In addition, the luminance setting information stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. In view of this, it is possible to shift to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit and adjust the luminance of the backlight to a predetermined luminance. In addition to displaying a screen for performing the setting mode on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 when operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, If the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is being demonstrated, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal. It is displayed on the display device 1400. By operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and the time information are reset, or the backlight luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is set to a desired luminance. Can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1400 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired for the above, to 80%. And when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 has been powered on for the first time, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of the control unit power-on process, and the time Current time information set in the information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

  As described above, the volume adjustment volume adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by rotating the knob portion. Can be done. As described above, the volume adjustment volume is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak can rotate the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music is received from a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and a speaker provided in the door frame. And sound effects.

  As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announces contents related to game effects (for example, an announcement that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 will be rendered more powerful, or that it is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player) The notification sound for the sound is also sent from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, but the notification sound and notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the sound level, and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) by the program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. Thereby making it possible to adjust it.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even if a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the loud sound (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume, the dial operation section and the press operation section of the operation unit are adjusted. By operating, you can switch to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. In addition to displaying a screen for performing the setting mode on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 when operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, If the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is being demonstrated, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal. It is displayed on the display device 1400. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit and the press operation unit of the operation unit according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150akZ converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume from an analog value to a digital value, The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume, and the operation of the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is performed. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to increase or decrease the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame must be opened from the outer frame. As a result, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume control volume. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 in a waiting state. When the dial operation part or the press operation part of the operation unit is operated within a certain period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation section and the press operation section of the unit. This allows the player to adjust the volume of music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, the operation unit dial You can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the operation unit or the press operation unit, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk loud and feel noisy music or sound effects, The pressing operation unit can be operated to reduce the sound volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is repeatedly demonstrated (for example, 10 times). ) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation part and the pressing operation part of the operation unit, and is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game will now have the dial operation unit and the press operation unit of the operation unit. To reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Next, a power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

  The power board is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the power supply board includes a power supply control unit 855 and a launch control unit 857. The power supply control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The unit is a circuit for driving and controlling the launch solenoid and the ball feed unit ball feed solenoid of the ball hitting device.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 and to the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 volt (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 855b. This power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 857a and the power generation circuit 855d of the launch control unit 857, respectively.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 launches a game ball toward the game area 5a with launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle body using + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power supply. While controlling the drive current for (launching) and outputting it to the firing solenoid, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit is controlled by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid of the ball feeding unit. One game ball stored in the ball is received, and the game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the ball hitting device.

  The power generation circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system supplied with + 5V is supplied as a + 5V power supply line, a power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied as a + 12V power supply line, and a power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied as a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V created by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as will be described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control filter circuit 4100h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and the payout control. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the substrate 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit on the power supply board flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 A current flows toward the direction. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is supplied with + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board returns to the payout control board 4110 and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. Can be recharged. Thereby, when + 5V created by the power generation circuit is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as payout VBB. The power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a does not flow because the current is blocked by the diode PD0, and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate. It is like that.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110. In addition to being connected, the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. Be able to. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit of the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V. In this case, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the diode MD0 is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. However, the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is hindered by this, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

  Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply substrate are supplied to the payout control substrate 4110 as shown in FIG. 74, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V are provided. Two kinds of voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral control board 4140 and Each is supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board.

  Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are shown in FIG. 75A. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 are provided. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a panel motor or solenoid.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 4140b that generates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board. Yes. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal module 470a of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 246, respectively. . Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power source 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the backlight power source 470b of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, respectively.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards and the like of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). Circuit. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. . Note that +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 4100 includes a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, a power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and the + 5V of the main control board 4100 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. 75 (b). At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  Next, the circuit of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 78 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 74 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 4100. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V generation circuit 4100g, and a main control MPU 4100a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 76, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz) )) Mainly.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 73 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and + 5V creation is made. When the circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 76, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic is LOW. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The attached main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 76, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a clock signal of 24 MHz is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is provided with the payout shown in FIG. This is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch provided on the control board 4110 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input will be described.

  First, as described above, the operation switch includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and a main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the PC, or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time of turning on, and an error canceling after turning on the power (after a period of time for functioning as a RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period of time after turning on the power) And a function to perform. The main control board 4100 does not have an error canceling function that the payout control board 4110 has. Therefore, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 4100 has a built-in main control. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the RAM.

  The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is not operated, while the logic is HI from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is operated. The operation signal thus obtained is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 76, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch provided in the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power is a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of MR2, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch on the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch is provided. Pulled up to + 12V side by pull-up resistor. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is inputted as LOW, while the operation switch is operated. Sometimes, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor, and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. The When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the main control MPU 4100a does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM. To do.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch is operated, an operation signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor and becomes logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch whose logic is LOW because the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The The main control MPU 4100a instructs to clear the RAM for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. to decide.

  The operation signal from the operation switch is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, it is higher than the control reference voltage +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general prize opening switch 3020 and the start opening switch 3022 that are directly input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor, while the panel shown in FIG. The detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, the gate switch of the effective gate, and the gate switch that triggers the normal lottery input via the relay terminal plate 4161 are the main control. Since it is not directly input to the substrate 4100, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor in the same manner as the operation signal from the operation switch.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failures or momentary power outages, and detects a power outage notice signal as a power outage notice in addition to the main control MPU 4100a when a sign of power outages or momentary power outages is detected. 4110 is output to the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the + 24V monitor voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 77, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (which is set to 21.40V in this embodiment) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 77, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end connected to the + 12V power line and the other end of the resistor. The other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND) is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of output in the main control-side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 4110 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the main control input circuit 4100b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. In the circuit 4120b, one end of the circuit 4120b is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In FIG. 7, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). 4140 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is sent out to the payout control board 4110 No reset function to output as a power failure warning signal The control circuit 4100cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 4140. The logic of the signal is inverted and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control input circuit 4100b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting between the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, between the boards with 4110 and between the boards with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, Dispensing control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

  Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 68 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a main payout serial data transmission signal and do not have a reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the payout control board 4110 and transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as the start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 68 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b. Etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. And a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, or various displays such as the first special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. To the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various display output to the reset function main control output circuit 4100ca the issue.

  Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 74 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

  + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 76 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The unit 4100aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 4100aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec and transmits it. When transmission is performed from the shift register 4100aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 76 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for main control board of peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When electric power or a momentary power failure occurs, + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is sent to the main control MPU 4100a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 4100cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being broken, and to prevent omission of the command, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a reset that causes all of the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

  Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 84. 79 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 80, and FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 84 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 84, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply board 851 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the like. .

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 74 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not flow. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the payout control unit 4120 is reset as a peripheral circuit in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

  As shown in FIG. 79, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 79, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

  The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 79, and the blackout monitor circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 69, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and the like. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full switch and the various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 69 have an output terminal of an open collector output type. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is substantially the same, here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described.

  The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) when the door frame is opened from the main body frame, and the door frame is closed by the main body frame. The switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 68 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR20 is The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, thereby turning on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to the + 5V side so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, When the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame opened from the outer frame, and the body frame is closed to the outer frame. The switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and also at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 68 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 4100 is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the outer end frame door opening information output signal becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 4100 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 3 does not occur during a normal game, and an outer end frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer edge is designed to be The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer frame door opening information output signal. Although it cannot be determined whether or not the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The main body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) in a state where the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) in a state where the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body is not used for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 4100 even when a normally open switch is used or a disconnection occurs. An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  A transmission line for transmitting a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V voltages. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the dispensing control board 4110. When the condition is satisfied, the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. In some cases, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 4100e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU4100a are the same logic.

  The detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. The output terminal of the full switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and electrically connected to the first terminal of the full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. This full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 via the resistor PR44b. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off in response to a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is controlled by the payout control via the handle relay terminal plate and the power supply board 851. In the substrate 4110, a signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and becomes logic HI is input to the payout control substrate 4110. On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the game balls stored, The voltage applied to the output terminal of the tan switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851, and the signal whose logic becomes LOW is outputted. 4110 is input.

  When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is applied to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. When a signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) and has a logic low level is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to a switch circuit constituted by the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full switch three-terminal filter PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. It is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit attached to the door frame, it is compared with the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. provided in the prize ball device attached to the main body frame 3. Then, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit is filled with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 4120a receives from the full tank switch 550. Based on the detection signal, when it is determined that the storage space is full with the game balls stored, the drive control of the payout motor 7 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped. It is like that. In other words, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped, or the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the storage space is full with the stored game balls. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by rotating the payout rotator and continuing to pay out the game ball, the payout rotator itself can no longer rotate and the payout motor 744 The load is abnormal, the payout motor is overloaded, abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the mechanism that transmits the rotary shaft of the payout motor to the rotary motion of the payout rotor is broken. Sometimes referred to or. Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted so that a noise signal is first removed from the detection signal from the full switch 550 in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50.

  The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43. Is input.

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is + 12V in the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 860a repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time of turning on the power). In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 860a is the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic clear signal HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW because the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied thereto, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4120da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor driving voltage, and the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 through the Zener diode PZD60 The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, and supplied to the dispensing motor 744.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 744. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

  Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 70 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 70 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 83, the input / output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, one end of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 79 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 851 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 851. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 851. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Then, the BRDY signal whose logic applied to HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal notifying that the one-time payout operation is started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. The photocoupler PIC 73 is turned OFF when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the non-reset payout control output circuit 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, and when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

  Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the RXD terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a receives serial data from the main control board 4100 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a has the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout blackout signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) For example, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signal from the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 69 is input via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Or outputs a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and outputs a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. For example, a payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function outputs the payer ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 69 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to drive the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84A, the payout control board 4110 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probabilistic fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and middle information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

  The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), in addition to the outer frame door opening information output signal described above, a prize ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor, From the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to jackpot information output signals such as 15 round jackpot information output signals and 2 round jackpot information output signals, information output signals during probability variation, special symbol display information output signals The game information signals such as the normal symbol display information output signal, the time reduction information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. For example, when a 15 round jackpot information output signal or a 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (2 The sum of the number of occurrences of round jackpot) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of occurrences of round 15 jackpots) is the number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits and the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a player determines whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of big hits for rounds and the number of occurrences of big hits for two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of big hit gaming status, Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 86 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 88 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 86, and FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch, the start opening switch 3022, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. Based on this, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740), which is a storage tray, is a game ball as a rental ball. When such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “CR machine”, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), a payout control board is connected from the main control board 4100. Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to 4110. One prize ball is designated by command 10H, and two prize balls are designated by command 11H. ..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor for the designated number of prize balls. .

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are electrically connected (such pachinko gaming machine). As shown in FIG. 85 (b), command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, and the command 20H 1 designates one prize ball, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,..., 15 prize balls are designated by the command 2EH. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 85C, and the self-check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, ordinary synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

  The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 68. As shown in FIG. 86, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning one special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  The special figure 2 tune production effect is based on the detection signal from the switch of the second start port 2008, and, as shown in FIG. Concerning the symbol display 1186, it is composed of commands with names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closing display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a big hit ending, a big hit symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the big prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the big prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the lower big prize opening 2003 or the right big prize opening) 7000 N-th round opening or starting opening), and the winning prize opening 1 closing display command starts the closing of the big winning opening 1 between rounds (the lower winning prize opening 2003 or the right big winning opening) 7000 rounds being closed or starting to close), and the winning prize 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 68, The number of game balls that have entered the Shimodai winning entrance 2003 or the right winning entrance 7000). Is intended to indicate the ending start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is the start of the small hit opening (the lower big winning port 2003 or the right big winning port 7000 is released at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a game ball that has entered the small hit middle big prize opening winning effect (the lower big winning opening 2003 or the right big winning opening 7000 during the small hit) In the case where is detected by the count switch 2110), the small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is when the big winning opening 1 is released in the 1st to 16th rounds (lower big winning opening 2003) Or, when the Nth round of the right side big prize opening 7000 is opened), the big prize opening 1 closing display command is when the big prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the lower big prize opening 2003 or the right side big prize opening 7000 is started). The 1st prize display counter command is transmitted when the 1st prize opening 1 is opened and the count changes to the 1st prize winning opening 1 (when the lower 1st prize opening 2003 or the right side 1st prize opening 7000 is opened, and the lower 1st prize winning Jackpot ending command sent to the game 2003 or when the game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 7000 is detected by the count switch 2110) Sent at jackpot ending start, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the 7000 inferior vena winning opening 2003 or the right special winning hole).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (at the time of the small hit, when the lower big winning opening 2003 or the right big winning opening 7000 is opened). The small hit count display command is when a small hit middle / large prize winning prize is received (when a game ball that has entered the lower big winning prize 2003 or the right big winning prize 7000 in the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. 69). Or give instructions).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clearing and RAM clearing when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The general pattern synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 68, and is divided into the general pattern synchronization related to the normal symbol display on the function display board as shown in FIG. It consists of commands with the names of production start, universal symbol designation, universal figure synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The ordinary electric role effect is related to the movable pieces 2008a and 2008b that are opened and closed by the driving of the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 68. It is composed of a command with the name of electric opening display and ending per usual map. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is for instructing the start of opening per base map, and the general power open display command is for instructing the start during the opening of the general power (the state where the movable piece is expanded by driving the start solenoid). In addition, the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of opening per universal figure, and the general electric open display command is displayed when the normal electric is released (when the movable piece is expanded by driving the start opening solenoid). The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the notification display is divided into a prize abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door frame opening, a door frame closing, a main body frame opening, and a main body frame closing. It consists of commands named These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating) (a game ball enters the lower big winning port 2003 even though it is not a big hit, and the game is played) When the ball is detected by the count switch 2110), an instruction to start a prize abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical signal on a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. In this case, the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is used for, for example, electrical connection between the main control board 4100, the start port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, and the like. When the disconnection / short circuit occurs, the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display is instructed. If the abnormality detecting switch 3024 has occurred it is an indication of the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification.

  Further, the door frame opening command is transmitted from the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door frame closing command is used for the door frame closing command based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When it is in a closed state, an instruction to end the door opening notification is given. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command causes the main body frame to open to the outer frame based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The main body frame close command indicates that the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame based on a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the body frame release notification.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is one of the start port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, etc., which is disconnected or short-circuited. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door frame opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame is opened to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619) and the body frame closing is performed. The command is transmitted when the main body frame is detected to be closed (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 87, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 71). Inspects various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2008 based on the detection signal from the start opening switch 3022. The command to change the movement shortening operation is instructed to change the state from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state. The special symbol 1 storage command is used for instructing the state transition from the probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 storage command is 0-4 special symbols 1 held (the game ball enters the first start port 2001 and the function display board The first special symbol display tells the number of balls that have not yet been used for variable display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the special symbol 2 storage command has 0 to 4 special symbol 2 holds (second start) The game ball enters in 2008, and the second special symbol display on the function display board informs the number of balls not yet used for the special symbol variable display (holding number)). Normal symbol 1 holding 0-4 pieces (the number of balls that have passed through the normal gate part 2005a and have not yet been used for the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display on the function display board) The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read based on the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used to display the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display board. The special symbol 2 storage prefetching production command is instructed to start the pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display. Figure Before being used to display the change, it is an indication of the prefetch effect initiation of notifying the advance notice of the display result of the second special symbol indicator based on the special symbol 2 pending read ahead.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2008 based on the detection signal from the mouth switch), the voice is mainly received from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is transmitted. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the outage stop period has elapsed) after digesting the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times”, and the special symbol 1 storage command is suspended. When the number changes (when the game ball enters the first start port 2001 and there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display of the function display board, the second start is further started. When the game ball enters the mouth 2008 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases from the number of holds using the special symbol display on the second special symbol display) The special symbol 2 memory command is still used when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2008 and is displayed on the second special symbol display of the function display board to display the variation of the special symbol. When there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2008 and the retained number increases, the second special symbol indicator can be used to display the variation of the special symbol. Sent when the number of holds decreases) The symbol memory command is a normal symbol 1 action when the number of reserved balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2005a and there is a number of reserved symbols that are not yet used for normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display of the function display board. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases from the number of holds used to display normal symbols on the normal symbol display) The symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 action holding balls increases (when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 and the holding number increases). The special symbol 2 is activated when the number of reserved balls is increased (when the number of held balls increases when the game ball enters the second start port 2008). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is transmitted mainly for voice notification from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame at the start opening winning prize. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 71 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame, in order to monitor the presence or absence of fraud The specification is to use. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening prize command, and the voice is received from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Some specifications do not report.

  Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 88, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) includes a ball round, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the ball round, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). Value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, the “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 69 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

  Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  Reference numeral 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs). If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings) are executed. , Setting interrupt timing, etc.).

  If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM. If the RAM clear switch for instructing clearing of backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) during the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 is activated to the peripheral control board 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Note that the backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  This process at the time of power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery) In this process, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the RAM checksum of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, the timer interrupt process is performed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, the normal electric accessory (movable pieces 2008a, b) is controlled, and the open / close state of the second start port 2008 is changed. Execute the process. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress of the game. A process for controlling special electric accessories (that is, an opening / closing member for opening / closing the right big prize opening, an opening / closing member for opening / closing the right big prize opening by the attacker solenoid, and changing the opening / closing state thereof) Execute.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit determination or big hit lottery), the big hit gaming state in the big hit determination A special jackpot symbol used to determine the special symbol stop symbol (the symbol associated with the jackpot type (probability jackpot, number of rounds, etc.)) Reach determination random number, special symbol display 641, used for determination (reach determination) on whether or not to perform a high expectation effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that neither a big win nor a small win (losing) is determined A variable display pattern random number (variable time fluctuation) used to determine the special symbol variable display pattern (variable time, etc.) displayed in 642 ) Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece in an open state to open and close the second start hole 2008 (ordinary lottery per determination), and the like.

  As will be described later, the jackpot determination random number according to this embodiment is also used to determine whether or not a specific condition to be performed when it is determined that the jackpot is lost (lost) is satisfied. Is done. In addition, the random number for the jackpot symbol is the type of jackpot performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won (whether the probability variation function or the time shortening function is activated, the lower prize in the jackpot game (special bonus game)) It is also used for the determination of the jackpot type in which the opening mode of the mouth 2003 and the right big winning opening 7000 are determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol hit determination related to whether or not the movable pieces 2008a, b are controlled to be in the open state. Update random numbers. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not the movable pieces 2008a, b are controlled to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, and the player Can be prevented from being disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

  Next, the special control process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, first and second start opening prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2008. Then, after the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

  More specifically, after finishing the first and second start opening winning (ball) processing (step S110), it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and the processing flag is 0. If so (YES in step S120), a change start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), after setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery, the processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (either the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator) After the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) from the start to the stop display is determined, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. Stop the fluctuation display. Thereafter, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to “3”. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied even though the big hit is lost (the win is won for the small hit), the processing selection flag is updated to “4”. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start processing, the type of jackpot is determined, and the opening mode (number of rounds, opening time, game ball winning limit number, etc.) at the lower jackpot 2003 and the right jackpot 7000 according to the type is set. Then, the processing flag is updated to “5”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game start process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game start processing, after the opening mode (such as the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening and closing member) is set in the lower big prize opening 2003 or the right big prize winning opening 7000 according to the small hit. The processing flag is updated to “6”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game process (step S240) is executed. In this jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member is controlled based on the opening mode at the lower big prize opening 2003 or the right big prize opening 7000 set in the big hit game start process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after determining whether or not to operate the probability variation function or the time reduction function. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is 6 and the small hit game processing (step S250) is executed. In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation applied to the open / close member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode at the lower big prize port 2003 or the right big prize port 7000 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). Is done. In addition, when the small hit game process ends, the process flag is updated to “0”, that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  As described above, when any one of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

  Next, the first / second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the first / second start opening winning process.

  In the first / second start opening winning process (step S110), the process mainly involved in determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2008, and the winning. On the condition that it is determined that there has been, the process related to the update of the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor (switch), it is determined that a game ball has been won at the second start port 2008 (YES in step S201). Next, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second holding is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 2008 (a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol for the second start hold storage process (step S203)) A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol or the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command is set to indicate that a game ball has been won at the second starting port 2008 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, it is possible to update the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the like on hold on the second start port 2008 side quickly through the control by the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value 4 If it is determined that the detection signal is, a determination is then made as to whether or not a detection signal has been output from the first start port sensor as processing of step S205. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor, it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 2001 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (such as the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  In other words, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first start port 2001 (a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) as the first start hold storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command is set, which indicates that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 2001 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). With such a configuration, it is possible to update the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the like on hold on the first start port 2001 side quickly through control by the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that no game ball has been won at the first start port 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) for the second starting port 2008 is executed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) for the first starting port 2001 is executed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 2008 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big hit lottery, the small hit lottery described later, and the determination of the variable display pattern), and the lottery result is determined in advance. It is processing. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to or similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number with the preceding determination table, the lottery result when the lottery is performed using the random number (whether the big hit or the small hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) (The determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (predetermined determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (the effect is “read ahead”). Also called “Direction”).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition. When the game condition does not satisfy the specific condition, the main control MPU 4100a A winning notification command that does not represent a result may be transmitted. For example, when the variable display resulting from winning at the first starting port 2001 is not started immediately after winning, but is put on hold, the main control MPU 4100a displays a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process related to the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits a winning notification command that does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be. The specific conditions regarding the second start port 2008 may be the same.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values (first start memory) of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642. It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start memory number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 are the storage areas for the first start memory and the second start memory (special symbol random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (see FIG. 94). Therefore, if both of the values of the holding number counter are “0” in this step S301 (YES), the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are related. When it is determined that none of the start conditions is satisfied and the process flag is updated to “1” as the process of step S318, the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both the first start memory number and the second start memory number are not “0” (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery that is in the hold state. Shift processing is performed in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (steps S302 to S310).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage areas [1] 4515a to [4] 4515d). These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage areas [1] 4532a to [4] 4532d), These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, and the like are stored. A jackpot symbol random number storage area 4581 is provided.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage units 4515 and 4532 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big win is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, and when the big hit is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side Thus, the profit given to the player (expected value for the probability fluctuation after the jackpot game) is higher in the lottery on the second special symbol side.

  In this regard, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the lottery of the first special symbol is postponed, and the lottery based on the winning at the second starting port 2008 (the lottery of the second special symbol) ) Is digested first, the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated. As a result, in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, the lottery (variation) execution timing of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol which is the side to be digested first is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game ball to the state where the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2008 is easy, the player can perform the lottery (variation) only on the second special symbol side. The game can be continued in a state where the expectation for the predetermined profit is high.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 101, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested. Whether or not the value of the holding number counter (second starting storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is “0”, that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. Judge whether or not. As a result, if it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second storage area [1] 4532a stores the second random number. A random number related to the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). In other words, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for reach determination, variation display pattern random number) are not limited to the process related to jackpot lottery, but the variation pattern (variation) Game for the second start port 2008 by being provided for processing related to setting of time, stop display mode, etc., processing related to setting of opening / closing mode of the big prize opening, processing related to setting of gaming state, etc. The second start game can be progressed with the winning of the ball.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532d) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (step S304). Accordingly, at least the storage area [4] 4532d is vacant, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp is performed so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting state in the second special symbol memory display 644. Is called. Note that the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 101, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that no random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and obtained (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is not only the process related to the jackpot lottery, but also the process related to the setting of the special symbol variation pattern, the process related to the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, and the setting of the gaming state As a result, the first start game can be progressed by winning the game ball at the first start port 2001.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage areas) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are respectively shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d is vacant, and new start information (hold) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “2” in the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side (first start game) is in progress (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). Also, at this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 643 is reflected so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode in the first special symbol memory display 643. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to “2” is reset when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot Select a highly set table. Depending on the type of gaming machine, for example, in a so-called max type gaming machine with a low probability of jackpot, when the probability fluctuation is not activated (ie, normal), the probability of jackpot is, for example, about 1/400. When the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high), the probability of being a big hit is set to about 10/400.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the big hit determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not a random number (hit value) corresponding to (step S315 (hit lottery)). If it is a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number for any special symbol acquired in the same manner in step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S319). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S320), assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not the small hit value (NO in step S319), the process proceeds to step S318 without going through step S320, assuming that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied. In step S318, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. For example, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, random numbers generated with a random number range of, for example, 0 to 99 as the jackpot symbol random number. Numeric values are prepared, and in the processing of step S303 or step S307, one of these random values is acquired as the value of the random number for the big hit symbol. Then, the acquired random number value is used for the process of determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, the jackpot A is determined. If it is 53-57, it is determined as big hit B, if it is 58-63, it is determined as big hit C, if it is 64-81, it is determined as big hit D, and if it is 82-99, it is determined as big hit E. Is done. The big hits A to D are classified according to the degree of expectation for the passing of the probability variation area 6970 of the game ball.

  By the way, when such a big hit (hit with the operation of the condition device) is won, and a small hit (hit without the operation of the condition device) is won, the opening and closing of the big prize opening is a small number with a short time opening and closing pattern A game per small opening (small hit game) that is repeated once (twice in this embodiment) is performed, and before the game per small opening (small hit game) is performed and after the game is performed The gaming state is not different. The small time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined small time has elapsed after the grand prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, or that a predetermined small number of game balls have won the lower major prize opening 2003 or the right major prize opening 7000. When any one of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing member is returned to the closed state. In the game per small opening (small game), a small amount of prize balls can be acquired by the player as a privilege.

  In the process of step S317, the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit type is turned on (set).

  Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in the figure, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Judge whether there is. As a result, when it is determined that the big hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), the big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed in order to set the fluctuation pattern when the big hit is won. This is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not “ON”, it is next determined in step S403 whether or not the small hit flag is “ON”. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S403), it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied although it is lost, and the small hit is won. In order to set the fluctuation pattern at the time, a small hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed (step S404).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not “ON”, then in step S405, a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect, etc.) with a high degree of expectation for winning the big hit is obtained. Judge whether or not to perform. In the process of step S405, for example, when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 95) is a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is performed, and the acquired reach is obtained. When the determination random number is not a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is not performed. As a result, if it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), a high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that a variation pattern for performing the high expectation effect is set. This is performed (step S406).

  As for the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the random numbers for reach determination, in the current gaming state, the normal external disadvantaged gaming state (both the probability changing function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state The game state may be differentiated for each of the game states of (probably only the time-shortening function), probability-changing external disadvantageous game state (only the probability-changing function is activated), and probability-variable external advantageous gaming state (both the probability-changing function and the time-shortening function are activated). For example, in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the probability that it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is “1/12”, and the normal external advantageous game state In the probable external advantageous game state, it is judged that the high expectation performance should be performed with a lower probability so that the expectation level at the time of the reach is further increased (or the efficient hold-up is performed). You may make it do. On the other hand, in the probable external disadvantaged game state, it is determined that a high-expected performance should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of a big hit can be made more conscious. Also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S405 that a high-expected effect with a high degree of expectation of winning a big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the loss variation pattern when the high-expected effect is not performed In order to set (a normal loss variation pattern), a low-expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expected loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in association with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value. When this is the case, the shortening variation is performed.

  In the gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the variation time is set so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side is not easily interrupted. More specifically, when the number of reserves on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the shortened variation is not used in spite of the gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, and the shortened variation is employed in the normal gaming state. Only the variation time (variation time longer than the shortening variation in the normal gaming state) having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when not being played is selected. In addition, the variation time on the first special symbol side will not adopt the shortened variation regardless of the number of reserves, only the variation time having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when the shortened variation is not adopted in the normal gaming state. Is to be selected. As a result, when the gaming machine is in a game state in which the short-time function is activated, it is possible to suppress the holding of the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a small hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

  As will be described later, as shown in FIG. 95, when the selection table for the variation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, step S406, and step S407, the main control MPU 4100a In step S410, a special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the set selection table. Next, in step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as an effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) or the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command that shows the winning type, including winning and winning hits).

  Furthermore, the value of the variation time according to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is performed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The change display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as a device is started. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern shown by the effect command and the information shown by the winning information command through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Thus, the display effect is performed.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. Without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is extended to the period after the stop of the variable display on the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs. (Extension effect pattern in FIG. 111 (b)) may be executed to show that the winning is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. In other words, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when a game per small opening is executed, a display effect that encourages the acquisition of a prize ball does not appear, and it is relatively early after it is shown that a big hit is lost. It is possible to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol hold-up), and it is also possible to suitably avoid the extension that may give some expectation as an effect until the opening / closing member of the special winning opening operates. Become so.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a special effect is provided with respect to the display effect at the time of the small hit (extended loss effect) described above, which indicates that the big hit is lost after the special symbol is stopped. There is also a display effect (extended jackpot effect) that shows that the winner is won after the symbol stops. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 does not end within the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the first special The symbol display or the second special symbol display was won for winning (big hit) with the operation of the condition device after extending to the period after the stop of the variable display on the LED lighting pattern (Extended effect pattern in FIG. 111 (b)).

  That is, in this case, the display effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as a simple loss effect (highly expected loss variation pattern) that appears when the big hit is lost. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and as a result, the opening / closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the small hit. Can be suppressed.

  However, as the function display unit of the pachinko machine 1, eight LED groups that do not form a specific symbol may be adopted instead of the 7-segment LED. In this example, the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator constituted by 7 segment LEDs are each constituted by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display and the second special symbol memory display are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display is constituted by two LEDs.

  This function display unit can achieve the same effect as described above, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are configured by eight LED groups that do not have any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case where the 7-segment LED having the meaning by the numerical symbols is used. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the contents displayed on the function display unit, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to production images and the like.

  When such a function display unit is adopted, the lighting mode (when the special symbol is stopped) of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hit, It is desirable to perform control so that it appears as an aspect that is similar to each other, such as a difference from whether or not one LED is lit up from the lighting state of the symbol (when the special symbol is stopped). That is, in this case, when the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped, it is immediately determined which result is obtained (at least after the effect is extended). It will be difficult to grasp until a short time has elapsed until the winning is clearly indicated. Therefore, it is possible not only to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), but also to the period after the special symbol is stopped by reducing interest in the special symbol (multiple LEDs). Even a display effect that has been made can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the guessing that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 due to the particularity when the extended effect appears, and as a result, according to the winning of the small hit It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of big hit will be described based on FIG. FIG. 103 is a list chart showing an example of a normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, a normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3. In addition, ○ in the winning column in FIG. 103 means a big hit, △ means establishment of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and × means failure of a specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). means.

  As described above, if it is determined in step S401 (see FIG. 95) that the big hit flag is ON, the main control MPU 4100a is won in the big win as the process in step S402 (see FIG. 95). The big hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of the change is set.

  In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function only) Operation) and a probability change external advantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time shortening function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different big hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time-saving function are both disabled). When it is determined that the system is in operation), the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 103 is selected regardless of the type of the big hit.

  Then, as described above, when the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94) while referring to the selected table T1. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbols, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1. Among them, nine specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 9%), and 20 specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selection rate at big hit 20%), 30 specific values are assigned to variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (selection rate at big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are It is assigned to the fluctuation number 12 (fluctuation time Td1) (selection rate at big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 15 (fluctuation time Te) (selection rate 1 at big hit) %). Thus, except for the big hit fixed variation number 15, the number of specific values (hit values) allocated tends to increase as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the big hit is won with the effect content “a (or a ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect is performed and the change number 5 (change time Tb1) is selected, the winning content is won with the effect content “b (or b ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is displayed, and when the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, the big win is won with the content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the change number 12 (change time Td1) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the event that a display effect indicating that the player has won the jackpot is performed and the change number 15 (change time Te1) is selected, the effect content “e” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect is shown to indicate that the winner is won. Incidentally, the production content a, the production content a ′, the production content b ′, the production content b ′, the production content c, the production content c ′, the production content d, the production content d ′, and the production content e are all in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The types of display effects that appear (for example, the types of reach effects and the types of story effects) are different.

  As will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. Also, the fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

  As described above, in the normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). The effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command “01H” for variation number 1) and the winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning points per win) Command) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta1 for variation number 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, if it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is selected. Then, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, which of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side was won? Regardless of whether or not the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected, when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed, and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed Thus, display effects with different contents may appear by selecting the big hit variation pattern table having different contents.

  Further, when it is determined that the normal external disadvantageous game state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 103 is selected regardless of the big hit type. However, based on the state of the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit type, any of the normal big hit variation pattern tables prepared for each big hit type may be selectively used.

  That is, in this case, the selection rate of the variation pattern can be made different according to the type of jackpot, and when a specific variation pattern appears, there is a bias such as increasing the probability of being a jackpot of a specific type. It becomes like this. In addition, even if the variation time is the same, the variation number (production command) can be made different according to the type of jackpot. In this case, just by confirming the production command, The type of jackpot can be grasped. Therefore, if the appropriateness is determined by comparing the effect command and the winning information command on the peripheral control board 4140 side, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. Will be able to.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 95), the main control MPU 4100a performs the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 95). A small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern when winning is set.

  In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function) Only) and a probability-variable external advantageous gaming state (both probability-changing function and time-shortening function are operating). In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and normally both an external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time reduction function). When it is determined that it is inactive), the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 103 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a obtains by the processing of step S303 (see FIG. 94) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that a value from “0” to “99” can be acquired as the random display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained. Among the values, 35 specific values are allocated to the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at small hit 35%), and 30 specific values are the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2). (Selection rate at small hit 30%), 30 specific values are allocated to variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate at small hit 20%), 5 A specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 13 (fluctuation time Td2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 5%). In this way, the number assigned to a specific value (small hit value) tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display that shows the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, the display of the result of the big hit lottery is shown while the effect content “b (or b ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the production is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, the display of the big hit lottery result is displayed with the production content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, the effect “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Display performance the result of the lottery is shown is carried out. By the way, as such a display effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is shown, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit is lost, or a game state in which a winning ball can be obtained by the operation of the opening and closing member 2006 is transferred. A display effect (display effect that appears even when a big win is won) or the like is appropriately adopted.

  As will also be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result is obtained as a big hit lottery with the production content “a (or a ′)” appearing. A directing of what was done appears. The fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (fluctuation time) When the number 6) is selected, the production contents “b (or b ′)” appear, and a production of a pair appears as to what result was obtained as the big hit lottery. Further, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tc1 based on the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (fluctuation number 9) or the fluctuation time Tc2 (fluctuation time). When the number 10) is selected, the production contents “c (or c ′)” appear in each case, and a pair of productions appear as to what results were obtained as the big hit lottery. The variation time Td2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) of the variation time Td1 based on the variation time Td1, and the variation time Td1 (variation number 12) or the variation time Td2 (variation time). When the number 13) is selected, the production contents “d (or d ′)” appear in each case, and a pair production of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

  As described above, in such a normal small hit variation pattern table T2, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number obtained in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). And an effect command (for example, command “02H” for variation number 2) associated with the determined variation pattern, and a winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning hits per win) Are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta2 for variation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413) and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state Is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted. However, when a small win is won in a gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) It is desirable that the same display process as the low-expected effect at the time).

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of highly expected production will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 95) that a highly anticipated effect should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a performs high expectation as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 95). In order to set a variation pattern when performing an effect, a highly expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

  Even in this high-expected loss variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state ( It is determined whether the game state is one of the probability variation function only) and the probability variation external advantageous game state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high expectation loss variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function, time reduction function) Is also inactive), the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 103 is selected.

  As described above, when the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and performs the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbol, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3. 40 specific values are allocated to variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selection rate 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are variation number 4 (variation time) Ta4) (selection rate at high expectation loss 17%) and 25 specific values are assigned to change number 7 (change time Tb3) (selection rate at high expectation loss 25%) , 13 specific values are allocated to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at the time of high expectation loss), and 3 specific values are allocated to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (Selection rate at the time of high expectation loss) %), Selectivity of 2% during the two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3) (High disappointing). In this way, the number of specific values (loss values) allocated tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, the winning content was lost on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “a, no development (or a ′)” appearing. When the display effect is displayed and the change number 4 (change time Ta4) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has been defeated in the big win while the effect content “a, with development” appears. Is displayed, or a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated in a big win with the effect content “c ′” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When the effect is displayed, a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated with a big hit is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “b, no development (or b ′)” appearing. When the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, a display effect or a liquid crystal display indicating that the player has lost the jackpot with the effect content “b, with development” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect is displayed on the display device 1400 and the winning effect is “d ′” and the winning effect is shown, and the change number 11 (change time Tc3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. When the production content “c (or c ′)” is displayed, the display production is performed to indicate that the player has lost the jackpot. When the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, the liquid crystal display In the device 1400, a display effect is shown which indicates that the player has lost the jackpot while the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears. By the way, as will be described later, when the variation number is 4 or 8, it appears as a loss production pattern with different production contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Since the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern which is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side is set. In response to this, it is possible to cause production patterns having different jackpot expectations.

  Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2), or the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, the production content “a” appears, A production of a pair about whether the result was obtained appears. However, when the variation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the production content “a” is displayed until the opening period before the lower big prize opening 2003 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) according to the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that becomes the pair of the variation number 4 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 ( When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the production contents “b” appear, and a pair of productions appear as to what result was obtained as a big hit lottery. However, when the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the production content “b” is displayed until the opening period before the lower big prize opening 2003 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) in accordance with the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, the change number of the jackpot effect pattern that is the pair of the change number 8 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the change number 5 and the change number 12 as described above.

  As described above, in such a normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). Then, an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (eg, command “03H” for variation number 3) and a winning information command (including winning and winning points for winning and winning the winning combination) The command indicating the seed is set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta3 for variation number 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is displayed. A selection is made, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  According to such a normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, a normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3, the big hit expectation degree is a display effect b rather than a display effect a. The display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the jackpot is won, it is determined that the jackpot is won when the effect e appears.

  Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  As shown in the figure, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the change time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 95) as the process of step S501. Determine whether the time is up. If the variation time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S501), the in-fluctuation process is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is performed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of special symbols) related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as a container is ended. In addition, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect should be confirmed and displayed on the peripheral control board 4140 in order to end the display effect. Is set (step S503). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode in the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended despite the reception of the definite stop command, and the subsequent opening period As described above, the display effect may be controlled so that the display effect is extended.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to “3” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the special symbol is suspended, as indicated by the fact that the big win is won (step S505). Then, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON but the loss is a big hit (NO in step S504), it is next determined in step S506 whether the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to “4” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the process stage where the special symbol is suspended as indicated by winning the small hit (step S506). S507), the process during change is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON but is a pure loss (a loss that does not satisfy the specific condition) (NO in step S506), it is special to indicate that both the big hit and the small hit are lost. The processing flag is updated to “0” on the assumption that the symbol is in the processing stage where the variation is stopped (step S508), and the variation processing is terminated. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S130.

  Next, the big hit game start process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process.

  As shown in the figure, in the big hit game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first activates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as a process of step S2602, a function (probability variation function) that increases the winning probability of winning (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device than when in the normal external disadvantageous game state or the normal external advantageous game state is being operated ( It is determined whether the state is a probability variation state. As a result, when it is determined that the game state is one of the probability variation external disadvantage game state and the probability variation external advantageous game state and the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S602), the probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S603).

  Then, as a process of step S604, a function (time-short function) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second start port 2008 is in operation (time-short game state) while the operation of the probability variation function is thus stopped. It is determined whether or not. If it is not determined in step S602 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing step S603. As a result, when it is determined that either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the probable variation external advantageous gaming state is in effect and the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S604), the time reduction function is activated. Stop (step S605).

  Then, next, in order to perform the big hit game with the operations of the probability variation function and the time-shortening function being stopped in this way, as the process of step S606, the lower big prize port 2003 or the right big prize port 7000 in the same big hit game. The maximum number of round games that are repeatedly released, the upper limit number (predetermined large number) at which each game can enter game balls in each round game, and the opening / closing of the big game ports in each round game An opening mode in the big hit game such as a member opening / closing operation restriction time (a predetermined long time of the long time opening / closing pattern) is set. That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 94). Information related to the “opening mode in jackpot game” prepared in association with each type of jackpot determined in this way is read from the ROM or the like of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). The set information is set. As a result, the big hit game can be executed with the above-described opening mode corresponding to the big hit type. If it is not determined in step S604 that the time saving function is in operation, step S606 is performed without executing step S605.

  After that, before the big hit game is played, an interval production (for example, an opening production such as “Congratulations” or a challenge bonus production such as “Obtain a chance to win!”) Is executed. As is possible, an interval effect command at the time of a big hit indicating the time until the special bonus game (big hit game) is started after the special symbol is stopped is set (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped (as described above. Since the extension effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is prepared based on this. That is, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit because of the time required for the extended effect that appears even when winning the small hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the later-described control by the peripheral control board 4140 side, either the interval effect as described above or the extended effect as described above is selectively performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 is set (step S608), and the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609). Then, the jackpot game start process is terminated.

  Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in the figure, in the small hit game starting process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the small hit game as the process of step S701 so that the small open game (small hit game) is performed. The number of times the lower grand prize opening 2003 or the right big prize opening 7000 is repeatedly opened (in this embodiment, twice), and the upper limit number (predetermined to allow a game ball to enter the big prize opening when opened) The opening mode in the small opening game (small hit game) such as the small number) and the opening / closing operation restriction time (small time opening / closing pattern) of the big prize opening opening / closing member at the time of opening is set.

  After that, prior to the small opening game (small winning game) being performed, an interval effect before the small game is performed (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as “Chance to get a chance!”) Can be executed. As described above, an interval effect command at the time of small hit indicating the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the small bonus game (small hit game) is started is set (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped when the small hit is won (as described above. Therefore, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, due to the relationship with the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big hit is won, a specific fixed time (for example, the random number for the big hit symbol) regardless of the symbol random number at the time of winning the big hit (for example, the random number for the big hit symbol) Only the interval effect command indicating 8 seconds) is set. Such a time setting when an extended production appears will prevent the presence of a small hit from being guessed, and as a result, the opening and closing member will operate according to the winning of the small hit, and the game entertainment will be reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the process flag is updated to “6” (step S704). Then, the small hit game start process is terminated.

  As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

  Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in the figure, in the jackpot game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first turns on the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (set).

  Here, the big hit game in-progress flag is operated in the OFF state when there is a processing status immediately after the transition to the big hit game processing (step S240). Therefore, when the processing state is immediately after the big hit game process (step S240), it is determined that the big hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the process of step S802 I do.

  In the process of step S802, the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, challenge bonus effect for opening the lower big prize opening 2003 or right big prize opening 7000 (confirming the execution of the bonus game), or extension effect) is completed. It is determined whether or not the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 97) has expired. The interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) has not expired, and the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, the challenge bonus effect for opening the lower big prize opening 2003 or the right big prize opening 7000, or the extension effect) ) Is still being executed (NO in step S802), the jackpot game process is temporarily ended, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up through the processes in steps S801 and S802. (Interrupt processing is repeated).

  However, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, even when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired as a result of such processing (YES in step S802), only this is a big hit Whether the game ball has passed through an effective gate (special-purpose gate) 6010n (a specific receiving port) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired so that the game does not start. It is determined whether or not (step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the big hit game process is temporarily ended, and the process waits until it is determined in the process of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n ( By repeating the interrupt process), the opening / closing means of the big prize opening is operated until the game ball is received by the valid gate 6010n after the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer has expired. Without this, the extension is maintained in the closed state.

  According to such extended control over the closing control period of the big winning opening, the closing control period (opening / closing member is closed) after the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the big win until the big winning game is started. The period from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (in this case, 8 seconds) expires is defined as “predetermined after the special symbol is stopped and displayed”. When the first closing control period having a length is set (step S802), after the first closing control period has elapsed, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is set. The “control period” further appears (step S803). Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect that mutually uses an attribute as a closing control period having a predetermined length and an attribute as a closing control period having an indefinite length. .

  More specifically, for the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, it is used as an addition time with the change time of the set special symbol change pattern. As one unit, it is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a closed control period having a predetermined length, such as extending the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to a special symbol variable display. become able to. In contrast to the case where the display effect for the big hit lottery is executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period, the second closing control period (here, the effective gate 6010n). The time until the game ball passes) is controlled to have an indefinite length, for example, by playing a long movie on the liquid crystal display device 1400 until the opening / closing member operates using the same period. An effect using an attribute as a period can be realized. That is, for the second closed control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n), it is possible for the player to terminate the synchronization period as appropriate. Even in the case where a redundant performance is realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in game entertainment due to the extended performance, and the width of the performance can be expanded.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the bonus game (with the operation of the condition device is accompanied by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). The operation shifts to a state in which the operation of the opening and closing member (big hit game) according to the winning of the (win) is possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started as the processing of step S804, and also indicates that the jackpot game has already been performed. The middle flag is operated (set) to the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

  The jackpot start command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1400, through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. The display effect during the big hit game is performed. Further, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started in the next and subsequent interruption control by operating (setting) the big hit game flag in the ON state, such steps S801 to S804 are performed. Without performing the above process, the process from the following step S805 for performing the process related to the execution of the jackpot game is performed. Note that steps 802 and 803 are not set in the form of a gaming machine in which no valid gate is provided.

  In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (2003 or 7000) is open. If it is open (YES in step S805), then as the processing in step S806, the opening time of the special winning opening (elapsed time after opening) is set in the processing in step S606 (see FIG. 90). It is determined whether the open / close operation limit time (predetermined long time or predetermined intermediate time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S806), the winning opening is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S808).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S806 that the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet passed (NO in step S806), the same size is set after the big prize opening is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), the process of step S808 is performed. Move to, and close the big prize opening. On the other hand, if the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S806), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening has not yet reached the upper limit number ( In step S807, NO), the jackpot game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S805 that the big prize opening is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening is opened by the opening and closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is the above step S606 (see FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the maximum number set in the process is reached (step S809). If not reached (NO in step S809), the open / close member is operated to open the big winning opening (step S810), and the big hit game process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S809 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of times, the big hit (the hit with the operation of the condition device) is made by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. It will shift to the state where the operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member according to being won is impossible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S811 to step S817, so that the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separate from the big hit flag, for example, in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 94). The game state after the big hit game is set based on the winning type of the big hit, which is stored as a trigger for the execution of the big hit game, and then the big hit game process is terminated. Here, the winning type refers to whether or not the winning type activates the probability variation function and the time-shortening function. The content of the information about whether or not to activate the time-saving function depends on the gaming state when it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit.

  That is, first, the big hit flag and the big hit game flag are each set to the OFF state (step S811), and the winning type of the big win that is triggered by the big hit game is determined (steps S812 and S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation area 6970 described above. As a result, if this is denied, the process proceeds to step S814 without operating the probability variation function. On the other hand, if the process in step S812 is affirmed, the probability variation function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to step S814.

  In the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not the winning type activates the time reduction function. As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning species that activates the time reduction function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without operating the time reduction function (step S816), and when the processing flag is set to “0” (step S816). In step S817), the big hit game process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S814 that the winning type activates the time reduction function, the time reduction function is activated (step S815), and then the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S816). ), When the processing flag is set to “0” (step S817), the big hit game processing is terminated.

  According to such a jackpot game start process, until it is determined in the process of step S807 that the round game has reached the maximum number of times, the big prize opening is opened according to the type of jackpot (step S806, In step S807 and step S809), the game is repeatedly released, and as a result, a player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of jackpot.

  Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in the figure, also in the small hit game process (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first shows the small hit game indicating that the small hit game has already been performed as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is in an ON state (set).

  Here, the small hit game flag is operated to be OFF when the small hit game process (step S250) is in progress and the processing status is immediately after. Accordingly, when the processing state is immediately after the small hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hit game flag is not in an ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Perform the process.

  In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) has ended, that is, is determined in advance by the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 98). A determination is made as to whether or not the current time (here, 8 seconds) has expired. If the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not expired and the interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily terminated, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

  However, in the small hit game process (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big hit game process (step 240), as a result of such a process, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has timed out. In this case (YES in step S902), in order to start the small hit game only with this, next, as a process of step S903, a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started is set and the small hit game is started. The small hit gaming flag indicating that the game is already being performed is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, in this case, as long as the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closed control period does not appear (there is no extended control from the first closed control period having a certain length), the conditional device After completely removing the expectation that a bonus game may be performed according to the hit (big hit) with the operation of (not a notification by a production with a lot of false information, etc. It is possible to play a game (after removing the expectation by presence or absence).

  As will be described later, the small hitting start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91, whereby the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. In the above, the display effect during the small hit game is performed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Further, when the small hit game processing flag (step S250) is started in the next and subsequent interruption processing by operating (setting) the small hit game flag in the ON state, such step S902 is performed. Then, without performing the process of step S903, the process of the following step S904 for performing the process related to the execution of the small hit game is performed.

  In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then as the processing in step S905, the opening time of the special winning opening (the elapsed time after opening) is set in the processing in step S701 (see FIG. 98). It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (a predetermined short time of the short time open / close pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S905), the prize winning opening is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S907).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), the same size is set after the big prize opening is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit number set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S906), the process proceeds to step S907. Close the winning entrance. On the other hand, if the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening has not yet reached the upper limit ( In step S905, NO), the small winning game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S904 that the big prize opening is not open, the number of times the lower big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing member is set in the process in step S701 (see FIG. 98). It is determined whether or not the maximum number has been reached (step S908). If not reached (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening (step S909), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S908 that the maximum number of opening of the big prize opening by the opening and closing member has already been performed for the maximum number of times, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag are set to OFF. When operated (step S910) and the processing flag is set to "0" (step S911), the small hit game processing is terminated.

  According to such a small hit game process, until it is determined in the process of step S906 that the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening by the opening and closing member has reached the maximum number, the big winning opening is an opening mode corresponding to the big hit. Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the big prize opening, it is possible for the player to acquire a prize ball corresponding to the open mode.

  Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 110 illustrates an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

  In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 104, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, an initial setting process is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every 2 ms. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until the 2 ms steady process is set (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), a 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In this 16 ms steady process, based on various production commands received from the main control board 4100, the LEDs of the decorative boards provided in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 Processing for controlling the speaker is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process described above (loop process).

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first analyzes various command commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed effect command, the control (effect control process) related to the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a sound control process related to the sound output of the speaker for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect (step S1300). Furthermore, a light emission decoration control process related to light emission decoration by each decoration board provided in the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is executed (step S1400).

  After this, the information output for transmitting the commands (in addition to the display commands described later, sound output commands, light emission decoration commands, etc.) set in the above-described processes S1200 to S1400 to the lamp driving substrate and the liquid crystal control substrate. Processing is performed (step S1500). As a result, an effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frames, the decorative boards provided in the game board, and the like.

  After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is performed. The process ends.

  It should be noted that such processing in steps S1100 to S1600 (16 ms steady processing) is set as a processing amount that is completed within 16 ms, but it is assumed that when the time of 16 ms has elapsed from the start of 16 ms steady processing, the step is performed. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 has not been completed, the process in the above-described step S1600 is continued without changing back to the process in step S1100 (from the command analysis process). It will carry out to the processing of. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed by the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  Next, command analysis processing (processing in step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) first receives an effect command from the main control board 4100 as a received command of the peripheral control board 4140 as a process of step S1101. It is determined whether or not it is stored in a storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives the effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processes such as the 16 ms steady process and generates a command reception interrupt process. In the embedding process, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. In the reception command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order in which the effect commands are received from the main control board 4100. In the command reception interrupt process, these effect commands are associated with the reception order. Each of these areas is memorized separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the reception command storage area. (Step S1102).

  Next, whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (a command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 104). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. At the time of setting (step S1104), the command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (the command shown in FIG. 103) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is processed in step S411 (see FIG. 102). It is then determined whether or not the winning information command (the winning information command indicating the winning type including winning and winning points) is included in the effect command set on the main control board 4100 side ( Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), The command analysis process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the effect command received in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 is set. At the time of setting (step S1107), the command analysis process is terminated. As such effect commands, for example, a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 96), the step S606 (see FIG. 97), or the step S702. An interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of (see FIG. 98) and a big hit start set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S803 (see FIG. 99) There are a command and a small hitting start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S903 (see FIG. 100).

  Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in the figure, this effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the game progress state, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), and the jackpot display. Either the process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, as described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) is set. On the condition that the display is performed, a process for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, including the display of the decorative symbols. For example, a display effect pattern (decoration pattern stop pattern, presence / absence of the above-mentioned extended effect, etc.) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control board) In addition to setting the display command, settings related to the notice effect are also performed.

  Further, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1” basically corresponds to a fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 106). On the condition that the flag is set, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 including the display of the decorative symbols is displayed (to the liquid crystal control board 4150) so that the result of the big win lottery is displayed. To set display commands, etc. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the confirmed stop command is reset.

  Further, in the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to an interval effect command at the time of the jackpot that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 106), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display indicating that the big prize opening is opened on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) Each control is performed. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  Further, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 106). In addition, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays that the big winning opening is opened, and the control for displaying the effect in the small hit gaming state Do each. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the display effect at the time of big hit or small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended within the variation time indicated by the received pattern command. In the display effect after the extension, after extending to the period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display A case where the result of the jackpot lottery can be shown is provided.

  That is, in this case, as described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), an intermediate stage where the display stage in the liquid crystal display device 1400 has not ended has appeared even though the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set. The process will be terminated.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect thus extended is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). Processing to be performed continuously as a response to the contents to be processed. Therefore, in the process at the time of extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, the effect control corresponding to the command (display control indicating that the big prize opening is opened) is performed. Never do.

  As described above, the command set in the processing of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control processing is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, a display effect of the content (such as a display effect pattern) indicated by the command appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board side.

  The effect control process also performs a touch panel process. In this touch panel process, the effect control process detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 246. This effect control process acquires the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point, and performs an operation including this initial position. Get information. In addition, this effect control process may acquire not only such a coordinate value but the range of a contact surface. Details of the touch panel processing will be described later.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in an ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, based on the fact that a predetermined starting condition (YES in step S 301) is established on the main control board 4100 side, the variation pattern is processed in the process of step S 1104 (see FIG. 106). It will wait for the reception flag to be turned on.

  Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to be in the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the control related to the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232), and when it is determined that the state is not the same, the display effect such as the previous symbol variation ends. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) for starting a demonstration effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 106, so that the demonstration effect is produced in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board 4150 side. Will be executed.

  If it is not determined in step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol variation start process is temporarily terminated, and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221). Will wait until either condition is satisfied (YES in step S1236).

  As a result of performing such processing (step S1236, step S1237), when it is determined in the processing of step S1232 that the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232). In step S1233, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player with respect to the effect mode is permitted.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal The display effect in the display device 1400 is not terminated within the variation time of the variation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side, and a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display A display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) that can be displayed as to whether or not a win (bonus) with the operation of the condition device has been won after being extended to the period after the variable display related to the lighting pattern is stopped ) And a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected.

  Here, an overview of the extended effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected when in the second effect mode will be described. FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of big hit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit, FIG. 111 (c). These are figures for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG.111 (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  In the first production mode, if the result of providing an opportunity to get a prize ball (bonus game) is obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006, the production is extended until the period after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. A display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) at the time of extension having contents can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the big hit, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). However, after that, even when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (when the special symbol changes) or the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (rushing into the opening period) is set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The production will be continued without ending.

  That is, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the special symbol is stopped during the closed control period from when the special symbol is stopped to when the big bonus game is started based on the fact that the big hit is won. A time (first closed control period having a predetermined length) until a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) is up by the interval effect timer, and an interval effect timer. The time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n after the predetermined time (8 seconds in this case) has expired (second closed control period having an indefinite length) is controlled. ing.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 111 (a). In addition, the amount of time for the special symbol to be changed is the amount of time (first closed control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. In such a way, the display effect for the big hit lottery is performed. Such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  Then, when the first closing control period having a fixed length has passed and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is controlled, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 Is switched to the winning clarification effect in which the winning information about whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a winning (big winning) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is specified. Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a big hit effect in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. It can be realized as an effect that reflects the appearance of winning the battle. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning effect that the result of the effect appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that the production contents are extended to the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closed control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. .

  After that, on the condition that the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, the game ball is launched relatively strongly as an effect within the second closing control period. Control is performed so that the opening effect before the big hit game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by urging that the big hit game should be started by playing the right hit game in which the game ball flows down to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 To do. As a result, when a right-handed game is performed by the player, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 passes through the effective gate 6010n, and thus a jackpot start command is set. It becomes. As a result, when the second closing control period ends, the big hit game in which the big winning opening is opened is started (see FIG. 106). At this time, the round indicator 648 lights to indicate the number of rounds.

  In addition, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length is ended and a big hit game in which the lower big prize opening 2003 is opened (a flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, A jackpot game that indicates that the first round game has started even if the content of the effect is in the middle of the effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (winning effect or opening effect) It is executed by forcibly switching to medium production. However, on the other hand, the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends as long as the game ball does not pass through the effective gate 6010n after the first closing control period having a certain length ends. Since the flag is not set (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is not set), it is not forcibly switched to the big hit game effect indicating that the first round game has started.

  According to such extended effect pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed since the special symbol stopped, at least if the operation handle portion 410 is not operated, the effective gate Since the game ball does not pass through 6010n, the progress of the performance continues to stagnate in the performance before the start of the big hit game (the performance during the second closed control period). That is, in this case, the player starts the operation by not operating the operation handle portion until he or she understands the meaning of the effect before the start of the big hit game (the effect during the second closed control period). It becomes possible to continue stagnating the production in the previous production. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle part, the effect before the start of the big hit game ends and proceeds to the next effect (effect during the big hit game). My pace production according to each player's pace will be realized, in other words, the sense of speed required for the progress of the production can be realized as a production adapted to a wide range of customers regardless of gender Become.

  Furthermore, in such an extended production pattern at the time of big hit, as long as the production is not progressed from the production before the big hit game is started (the stagnation control of the production by the peripheral control MPU 4150a), the main control MPU 4100a is indefinite. By controlling so that the second closed control period with the length of the game will not be terminated, the game progresses and a big hit game (bonus game in which a prize ball can be obtained) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's side, just adjusting the speed of the production to match the pace of the player, the game will appear to progress to match the adjusted production speed, As a result, the personal pace effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be enjoyed without worrying about the game progress speed.

  As described above, the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit is the second closed control period that appears in such a way that the closed control period is extended after the first closed control period having a certain length is completed. In the second closing control period, part of the contents of the effect (winning effect) and the opening effect before the big hit game (within the second closing control period) By making a right-handed game, an effect that prompts the user to start a big hit game) can be performed. Then, the second closed control period can be ended at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, and thus the big hit game can be started at an appropriate timing. A timer may be provided for the main control board so that the second closed control period is not extended more than necessary. The main control board can forcibly set the big hit start command when the specified time has elapsed after the first closed control period has ended. The main control board may determine by lottery whether or not to set a timer.

  However, on the other hand, the second closing control period is a period that ends at least when the operation handle 410 is operated (a period with an indefinite length). When a game is played so that the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length is finished, It is also possible to proceed quickly to the next production (production during the big hit game) without making the cut or the production itself appear almost (production skipping). In addition, as described above, when the performance is advanced early in this way, the game control itself proceeds quickly, and the big hit game is started at an earlier stage. Therefore, while realizing a personal pace effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a player such as a veteran can enjoy a quick game / production performance that is efficient and stress-free by making the game progress earlier by skipping the production. To be able to.

  In particular, the time (game time) required for the opening effect in which the explanation of the right-handed game is given after the winning effect (big hit effect) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. Often only time. However, according to the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit, if the time (game time) required for such an opening performance is prepared, but this only functions as a wasteful time for the player, this is appropriately set. The production and the game can be advanced more quickly. As a result, it is possible to provide each player with an effect and game suitable for each player.

  By the way, the production time (game) is also cut by reducing the production time (time of the win clarification production time) for showing the winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (hit the big game) with the operation of the condition device. If it is advanced earlier, the final performance result in the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit (for example, whether or not the character wins the battle) does not appear sufficiently, and even the opening performance Without appearing, a big hit game production (round production etc.) will suddenly appear. In other words, in this case, the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit will be terminated at an intermediate stage before the result of the production sufficiently appears, so that even the opening production can be omitted and the big hit game can be started early. Become.

  By the way, in the production within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a winning clarification production is performed in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device. After that, an opening effect that encourages the player to start the big hit game by performing a right-handed game is performed. However, after the opening effect is performed for a predetermined time (or while the opening effect is being performed), a special feature movie dedicated to the big hit may be played. According to the second closed control period having an indefinite length, even if such a redundant production is realized, the production delay does not cause a bad effect such as a decrease in game entertainment. Can be widened.

  In addition, in the second closing control period, an operation acceptance with respect to a predetermined operation means (operation button unit or the like) is permitted, and an expectation degree regarding the result of the game lottery is shown based on the operation of the button. It may be possible to perform an operation system effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the number of rounds of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game, etc.). That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation system effect that allows the player to operate at his / her own pace without worrying about the expiration date (operation acceptance is allowed). It becomes like this.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is turned on in the round indicator 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the time when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol is ended. It is controlled not to be performed. Then, after the first closed control period ends, the control is released on condition that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the round display is turned on. As a result, during the second closed control period, it is possible to perform a win-win effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the round display is turned off. Further, it is avoided that the number of rounds in the big hit game can be easily grasped by the player, regardless of how much stagnant effect occurs in the second closing control period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit) is selected based on the winning of the small hit, the special symbol The time that the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) expires after it is stopped (the first closed control period with a certain length) is extended with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Thus, a display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. Such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the closing control from when the special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the small hit is won until the game per small opening (small hit game) is started. The period (opening period) consists only of the time (first closed control period having a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. Is controlling. Therefore, in such an extended performance pattern at the time of a small hit, a first closing control period (here, 8 seconds) having a certain length has elapsed, and a game per small opening (small hit game) At the start, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are displayed on the winning clarification effects indicating whether or not the winning information is whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. To switch to. Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a losing effect in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a win lost in the hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. This can be realized as an effect that shows the appearance of defeat in the battle with the enemy character. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning effect that the result of the effect appears, an extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment and Is an effect pattern in which the contents of the effect are extended to the period during which the small opening per game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. I can say that.

  According to the extended effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next change (special symbol hold-up) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. become. Furthermore, since the content of the production is extended to the period in which the game per small opening (small hit game) is performed, the liquid crystal is displayed during the execution period of the game per small opening (small hit game). The movement of the opening / closing member is less likely to be noticed as much attention is paid to the display device 1400. That is, in this case, since the content of the effect progresses in the same manner as when the so-called highly anticipated loss effect (the loss effect in which the opening / closing member does not operate), the loss effect pattern for the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit ( As a result, it is difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening and closing member when the small opening per game (small hit game) corresponding to the winning of the small hit is performed is similar or identical. A big hit game in which the opening and closing member is operated with an operation mode, a latent production state based on this (a latent production state using a so-called small hit), and the like are not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (see FIG. 111 (a)) in the first effect mode and the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit (see FIG. 111 (b)) are mounted with a small hit to the last. It was made based on the technical idea of making it difficult to grasp the pachinko machine 1 that has been used (technical idea opposite to the conventional one). In consideration of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closing control period, the opening of the big prize opening will also appear at the time of a big hit, the effect contents in each effect pattern are respectively extended. .

  In addition, in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit and the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device only after the time (first closing control period) until the timer (here 8 seconds) expires has passed Information is displayed (actual presentation of winning). However, with regard to these extended performance patterns, if the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of being extended to within the first closing control period, the display effects within the first closing control period are included. In the effect portion that appears, winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with operation of the condition device may be shown. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next change (reservation of the special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. Note that in this case, in the win-winning effect at the time of the big hit, an exclusive effect at the big hit that congratulates the character that it won the battle based on the fact that it has already been won, or a right strike is urged In addition to the effects for explaining the game, and in the demonstrating the win at the time of the small hit, the character is defeated by the battle and regrets that it is already known that the loss is a big hit A special effect at the time of a small hit will appear.

  As a result, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game) by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is provided in the second effect mode with respect to the extended effect pattern when in the first effect mode. In the case where it is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can select a challenge bonus effect pattern that indicates that the winning ball is won when winning is possible. The challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (winning type) as a winning where a winning ball can be obtained by opening a big winning opening.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected in the second effect mode based on the fact that the jackpot is won, the peripheral control MPU 4150a starts to change the special symbol. The display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to match (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  However, this display effect does not show the lottery result for winning the big hit, but it is at the point (big hit or small win) that the opportunity to win a prize ball is granted by opening the lower big prize opening 2003. It is shown whether or not it has been won (winning effect on the challenge bonus). More specifically, when a big win or a small win is won, it indicates that a chance to win a prize ball will be given by opening the big prize opening within the special symbol fluctuation period. A specific display image will appear. In this case, the player can not know how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the big prize opening, but can get the prize ball by opening the big prize opening. It becomes possible to grasp what is done.

  After the specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of big hit), A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus production about how many prize balls the player can acquire by opening. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, the time until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) expires after the special symbol is stopped (the first closed control period having a certain length) has elapsed. After that, the game is started on the condition that the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n.

  Here, in the pre-start production for starting the challenge bonus production, the operation amount (right) of the operation handle portion is utilized by using the first closing control period until the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) times out. Aiming at the effective gate 6010n by hitting game) and the operation timing will be described.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment may perform a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 as such a pre-start effect. This countdown effect is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, for example, while explaining that the right gate game is aimed at the effective gate 6010n, and this countdown display is changed to “0” When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as soon as the first closing control period ends.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the setting of the big hit start command is relatively early after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired. As a result, the second closing control period is ended, and as a result, a challenge bonus presentation and a jackpot game (special bonus game) are started at an early stage as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player. Become so. At this time, the round indicator lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

  That is, according to such effect progress in the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (indefinite length) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. Even if the second closing control period) is compared with the case of the small-hit challenge bonus effect pattern described later (see FIG. 111D), this time is ignored in terms of performance. It will be as short as possible. In other words, the above-described countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is terminated early to cut it, which will be described later. As in the case of the small bonus game pattern (see FIG. 111 (d)), only the first closed control period having a certain length appears as an interval period before the big game (before the challenge bonus effect). The game progresses in a form (progress of production). As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by opening the big prize opening. In addition to games and games per mid-opening, it is possible to provide an effect display regarding which game mode appears, including games per small opening.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is turned on in the round indicator 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the time when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol is ended. It is controlled not to be performed. Then, the round display 648 is turned on by releasing the control on condition that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n after the end of the first closed control period. Accordingly, prior to the challenge bonus effect being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player wins the big win by turning on the round indicator 648 and the number of rounds in the big win game (special bonus game) is given to the player. It becomes possible to avoid being easily grasped.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display changes to “0”, the time from when the game ball is launched until it passes through the effective gate 6010n is the following preceding effect (not shown). As a result, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (second closing with an indefinite length) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired is filled. The existence of the control period) can be further concealed in terms of production.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than the time at which the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up (first time) 1 within the closed control period 1). According to such a countdown effect, at least part of the time from when the game ball is fired by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is the first closed control period and the first Among the two closed control periods, the game is made possible so that it can be included as the time on the first closed control period side, and as a result, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is correspondingly increased. It can be shortened by (the amount included as the time on the first closing control period side). In this case, the preceding effect is also started in advance for the second closing control period, and as an effect that may straddle the first closing control period and the second closing control period. Will be positioned.

  Here, as a series of effects that lead from such a countdown effect to a challenge bonus effect through a preceding effect, for example, in the countdown effect, in addition to the countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the “countdown display is“ 0 ”. Attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing! ”And a challenge bonus effect indicating the result of the attack set is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 2500 (the flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is set), etc. Can be realized.

  Also, as a challenge bonus effect, for example, as a result of the attack that was set up, when the attack on the enemy character was avoided, it indicated that it was a game per small opening, but the attack hit the enemy character, but could not be defeated It can be realized by showing that it is a game per middle release, and showing that it is a game per long release when an enemy character falls due to an attack. Or, when an attack hits an enemy character but cannot be defeated, it indicates either a game per medium release or a game per long release. You may make it clearly indicate which is a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as an attack hits an enemy character, not only the amount of prize balls that can be earned but also the advantage to the player is eliminated as much as the possibility of a small hit is excluded. This also makes it possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation of transition to a new gaming state.

  However, in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, it is also assumed that the operation handle 410 may not be operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect changes to “0”. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big win is won. In the case of FIG. 111 (d), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  Although the countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, it is not necessarily counted as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the operation handle portion should be operated can be grasped. Good.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small win is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not A display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start of variation of the symbol (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  In the same way, in the bonus game pattern for small wins, the winning ball will be obtained by opening the big prize opening in such a production (winning production for the challenge bonus) performed during the special symbol fluctuation period. A specific display image appears to indicate that the opportunity is given. As a result, the player cannot acquire the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big prize opening, but can obtain the prize ball by opening the big prize opening. Can be grasped.

  In addition, after a specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of a small hit) is set. A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus production about the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big prize opening.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. Until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires (first closed control period having a certain length), and when the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n A game per small opening (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not a game ball passes through (see FIG. 98).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, in the small bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation of the operation handle (passing of the game ball to the valid gate 6010n) is essentially a game or effect. Although it is not necessary, as the pre-start production to start the challenge bonus production, the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up as in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus production pattern at the big hit. Using the first closing control period, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle 410 is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be performed.

  According to the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of small hits When the operation handle part is operated as instructed by the same effect, the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of big hits leads from the countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect The challenge bonus production is started with the same series of production contents. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by opening the big prize opening. In addition to games and games per mid-open, it is possible to display effects regarding which game modes appear, including games per small open.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, the countdown display is displayed in the countdown effect even though the game per small opening (small hit game) starts immediately after the end of the first closing control period. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the operation handle portion is not operated for a long time after changing to “0”. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment starts the false effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the countdown display changes to “0”, and starts the false effect on the preceding effect. When the provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the challenge bonus effect is also controlled to start false.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the challenge bonus effect from the countdown effect through the preceding effect, regardless of whether or not the operation system effect requiring an operation on the operation handle portion is performed. A series of production contents that lead to a false appearance (false production). Therefore, the player precedes the surrounding field horses who want to check the liquid crystal display device 1400 by confirming whether or not the operation handle portion is operated and whether or not the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n. It is possible to grasp that a game is played per small opening, and this makes it possible to show an intelligent act such as immediately suspending the game.

  Thus, as described above, the extended production pattern in the first production mode is the existence of the small hitting itself by continuing the second closed control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time. It is a production pattern aimed at concealment, and after extending the production content to the first closed control period with a certain length that also exists in the production pattern at the time of small hit, In the second closed control period that cannot exist in the effect pattern, the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect that prompts the player to start the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat the small hit as one of the hits by preventing the second closed control period having an indefinite length from appearing as much as possible. This is a rendition pattern that has a certain length that is also present in the effect pattern at the time of a small hit, as an opening effect before a big hit game (an effect that prompts the player to start a big hit game by playing a right-handed game) This is performed so as to be completed within the first closed control period.

  Such an effect based on the premise that a second closed control period having an indefinite length exists due to the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the production structure in which the timing for promoting the right-handed game within the second closed control period is different), even if the display production pattern based on one production command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), It is possible to greatly vary the length of the production time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decoration symbol) to the start of the big hit game between the first production mode and the second production mode. Thus, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  By the way, according to such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 111 (c)) and a small hit challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 111 (d)), a win effect display effect (specific When a display image appears, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is provided so that at least a specific number of prize balls (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. Once the player knows what will be done, it will be performed as a challenge bonus effect with a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be accumulated as a bonus .

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that the winning probability (3/400) without operation of the condition device is added to the winning probability (1/400) with operation of the condition device. With (1/100), not only can the prize ball be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member operates), but also that the game state can be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. You will be able to raise awareness. As a result, only a monotonous loss effect is repeatedly displayed due to the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, and the decline in the game entertainment is suppressed. .

  In addition, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even when the big win is lost, when the specific condition is satisfied, the display effect (specific display image) at the time of winning appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Despite the fact that the player can be aware that the prize ball can be paid out to the player and that the player is changing to an advantageous gaming state, the big win will be won in the operation of the big prize opening. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display a specific image that does not appear when the operation is performed (an image that appears when a false effect such as a preceding effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed even though there is no operation on the operation handle). I have to. In other words, in this case, until the big winning opening is opened in accordance with the winning of the big hit, it can function as a waiting effect period whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player as well as no change to the gaming state advantageous to the player is also the same image (false effect). Since it will be possible to obtain significantly less prize balls than when no appears, this indicates that the big hit was won, combined with the size of the gap of the profit that the player can obtain It is possible to further enhance the game entertainment when an effect (stagnation effect from the first closed control period) appears.

  And according to the structure by which such two production modes are employ | adopted, in the 1st production mode which can select an extended production pattern, when performing the game per small opening (small hit game), with respect to a player In the second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, while the effect that does not make it aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening and closing member operates), a small opening is possible. When the winning game (small winning game) is executed, the player can be presented with an awareness that the player can pay out the prize ball (in other words, the opening / closing member operates). As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, a higher probability (a smaller winning hit probability “1/400” is smaller than in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected). With the higher probability “1/100)”, which is the winning probability of winning “3/400”, an effect that makes the player aware that a prize ball can be paid out appears. The use probability of the bonus game (opening of the big prize opening 2 by the opening / closing member) that allows the player to pay out a prize ball without causing a change in the game state accompanying the operation of the condition device is increased. It becomes possible to realize a deeper effect as if it changes each time. In addition, in the second production mode, the player can hardly realize that such a production is the pachinko machine 1 in which the small hit is mounted in the first production mode. This is because a display effect is given in which not only the big hit but also the small hit is treated as one kind of hit that can be won by winning the big winning opening.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. Mode compulsory control means for creating a mode compulsory period that is forcibly determined to any one of the effect modes and that is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the compulsorily determined effect mode is provided.

  For example, a first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the first effect mode. The second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the period until a predetermined date such as the next one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode. When the control related to the creation of the mode compulsory period is performed, an effect is performed so as to conceal the fact that the small hits are mounted as described above for the first month. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 that can pay out a prize ball to a player with a winning probability. On the other hand, during the next month, the winning probability is higher than the winning probability by performing an effect in which the small hit is treated as one type of winning that can be won by opening the big winning opening. The pachinko machine 1 that can be paid out to the player with a probability is operated as a pachinko machine 1 and only one game specification is mounted. In addition to the fact that it was difficult to notice the presence of a small hit, it seems as if another pachinko machine that has a different game specification for obtaining the ball as well as the production contents on the liquid crystal display device 1400 has been newly operated. Impression can be given to the player. After the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation on the operation means during the demonstration effect.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 108, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs the first rendering mode and the second rendering based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not it is in a mode compulsory period that is compulsorily determined as one of the effect modes. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), the second production is performed. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is not allowed (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), the process waits for the variation pattern reception flag to be set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, based on the time information such as the calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa, it is determined that the mode is not in the mode compulsory period forcibly determined as one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode. When it is performed (for example, when the second predetermined period has already elapsed), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is permitted (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234 Perform the process.

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode. Here, the player's operation is, for example, an operation on an operation button unit or a sub button. When the main button or the sub button is operated while the demonstration effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is conceivable to perform display control for causing the selection screen for the production mode to appear. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, when a specific effect mode is selected by an operation on the sub button 372, and the selected specific effect mode is determined by an operation on the main button, the effect mode It is determined that there has been an operation by the player to change the game (YES in step S1234), and setting processing related to the production mode is performed to change to the decided production mode (step S1235).

  Note that the means to be operated by the player may not be the main button or the sub button of the operation button unit, and may be a predetermined operation by the player including a proximity operation using a touch panel. That's fine. In addition, as a process when an operation is performed by the player, in addition to control that causes a change in display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (appearance of selection screen, display at the time of selection, display at the time of determination, etc.), for example, transmission The player is informed that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 600 having the characteristics (change from blue to red, etc.). Alternatively, it may be shown.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is established, the following steps S1222 to S1227 for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are performed.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, on this basis, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (step S1223). The game state flag is operated to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

  Then, when the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (YES in step S1223), next as the process of step S1224, the setting state of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa Based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information, it is determined whether or not the first production mode is set. As a result, when the first production mode is forcibly determined or when the first production mode is set in a period in which the change of the production mode by the player's operation is allowed Then, it is determined that the first production mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

  In the processing of step S1225a, the change display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is stored with reference to the effect pattern table when the first effect mode is set. Based on the information regarding the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined.

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, when the first production mode and the second production mode are used, the notice pattern execution frequency and the contents of the production of the notice effect change in addition to the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the selection process, in the notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the first effect mode thus determined are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. 105, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set in a period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined or in a period in which the effect mode can be changed by the player's operation. If it is in the state, it is determined that the first effect mode is not set (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, the change display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is stored with reference to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. Based on the information regarding the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined. Next, in the notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect) related to the notice effect based on an appropriate notice determination random number, including the determination as to whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process for determining the pattern is executed (step S1226b).

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the second effect mode determined in this way are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 98, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1223 that the game state flag does not indicate that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (NO in step S1223), the detailed description is omitted, but the current game state An effect pattern and a stop symbol are determined based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), and an appropriate advance notice is included in the notice effect table corresponding to the current gaming state, including whether or not to execute the notice effect. A notice selection process in which an effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on the determination random number is executed (step S1230).

  Then, a display command (preliminary command) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern corresponding to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. 105, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in the figure, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) is read, and this variation pattern command is supported. The attached production pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 115 and 106). Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 112 and 113). When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, with respect to the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the case where the above-mentioned extended effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped is adopted (confirmed). It will stop (based on the stop command being set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an “extended effect pattern” and an “effect that is not an extended effect pattern but can be prepared as a pair of the extended effect pattern” can be prepared. A determination is made as to whether any of the production patterns “losing production pattern” has been determined in step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any one of these effect patterns is determined, when a predetermined stop symbol at the time of extension (a specific reach lose symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), step S1225a (FIG. 108) is determined. The processing of (see) is terminated. That is, in this case, during the opening period, the contents of the display effect centered on the story such as the character are extended (developed) in a state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the extended stop symbols. It will continue to appear, after which the result of whether or not you won the jackpot will be clearly stated.

  On the other hand, a normal production pattern that is different from any of the production patterns of “extended production pattern” and “losing production pattern that is not an extended production pattern but can be prepared as a production of a pair of the extended production pattern” (FIG. 112 (c), see FIG. 115), through the processing of step S1304 to step S1310, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery indicated by the winning information command is determined.

  That is, first, based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 106), it is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225a (see FIG. 108) is terminated.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. The stop symbol dedicated to the small hit is determined (step S1307). However, in the first effect mode, since the effect commands are all associated with the extended effect pattern so that the presence of the small hit is concealed, the processing in step S1306 is always performed. Then, it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and next, as a process of step S1308, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a display effect (high expectation loss effect) in which reach is formed.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, when the stop pattern of reach loss is determined (step S1309), the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 108) is terminated, whereas reach is formed. If it is not a display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 108) is terminated at the time of determining an irregular stop symbol in which reach is not formed (step S1310).

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 110, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) is read, and this variation pattern command is read. The associated production pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. It may be. When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, for the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, when a lottery result that enables winning balls is obtained, the special symbols are adjusted to stop changing ( The stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hit is stopped (based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the determination of the stop symbol is based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the processing of step S1106 (see FIG. 105). Judgment is made as to whether or not the lottery result is a hit (big hit or small win) at which a winning ball can be obtained (steps S1322 and S1324). As a result, when the result of the big win lottery is a win (a big hit or a small win) where a winning ball can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the opening of the big winning opening is confirmed. When a bonus challenge stop symbol that can be grasped is determined (step S1323), the processing of step S1225b (see FIG. 108) is terminated. The bonus challenge stop symbol is realized by, for example, a special symbol that does not become a component of the jackpot symbol combination appearing during the change, and the symbol combination included in the symbol combination at the time of stop, etc. can do.

  In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. Round lottery elements such as how many prize balls can be added as bonuses after the player knows that the opportunity to get prize balls will be provided There will be a challenge bonus performance.

  On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a hit (big hit or small win) in which a winning ball can be obtained (NO in both the processes of step S1322 and step S1324), the process of step S1325 is performed next. A determination is made as to whether or not the display effect is a reach.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, when the stop pattern of reach loss is determined (step S1326), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 108) is terminated, whereas reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 108) is terminated when the irregular stop symbols where the reach is not formed are determined (step S1327).

  Hereinafter, an example of a display effect that appears when such various processes (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment are performed will be described. FIG. 112 is a time chart illustrating an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” illustrated in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 103 is based on the fact that the big win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of whether or not the character can be succeeded (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is in a situation where the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta1 has arrived. The display effect a is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission a to succeed or fail).

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time period fluctuating Ta1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss when extending. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, since a display effect a (not developed, lost) described later associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. 103 is prepared, the display effect a even at the time when the timing t1 has elapsed. This will function as “development display effect a (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission a)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect a” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being maintained in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after the final stoppage. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (the effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is hardly noticed such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the display effect a. However, the player can grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission “a” in the display effect “a” can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design (the result is displayed by the character). More desirable.

  In other words, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, the actual effect is not displayed in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped. However, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has succeeded (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such an expectation. Under the circumstances, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, a time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a situation in which the character A again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission a can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect a (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command “02H”. And, as described above, when the player is in the first effect mode, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reserved digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, a specific period of time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. The state of success in mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and an effect on whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (character A attacks the enemy and succeeds) Only the production). As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect a can appear in a manner indicating that the specific mission a has been successful after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, and is associated with the effect command “01H”. The display effect pattern that is displayed functions as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  However, as described above, in the extended performance pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. Two closing control periods appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect a) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (timing tx), the second closing control period As a result, the jackpot game and the effect during the jackpot game are started. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 111A, the second closing control period from the timing t2 to the timing tx is ended based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Therefore, for example, as soon as the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the effective gate 6010n is moved to the game ball by operating the operation handle portion 410. When the game is played so that the game passes, the big hit explicit production a and the opening production are cut at that time, or the production itself is almost not appeared (the production is skipped), and the next production (production during the big hit game) is forced. It will be progressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, FIG. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, assuming that the variation relating to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 5 (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the variation time Ta1) is started (timing t0). , A display effect a at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy)) The dynamic display of the extended production pattern with contents is started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 112A) associated with the effect command “01H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not ended (the specific mission a is not succeeded or failed). ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”. Further, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “01H” (FIG. 112) is also the point of finalizing and stopping with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). Note that the lost stop mode at the time of extension is a single display mode regardless of the big win lottery results for the big hit and the small win, and the display mode is distinguished. Has not been.

  Furthermore, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for a, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) This is the same as the extended production pattern (see FIG. 112A) associated with the production command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, Actually, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, such an expectation that the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successful (for example, a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy has risen) is expected. Under the feeling, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, for example, the state until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a state in which the character A faces the enemy again is displayed. An effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful is performed.

  Furthermore, in the same manner, until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives, there is no indication that the specific mission a has been successful (the character A defeats the enemy). An effect about whether the mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether the character A attacks the enemy and succeeds). However, as described above with reference to FIG. 111 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “02H” Lost explicit production a will appear in a manner that shows the failure of mission a. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  For example, the loss explicit effect a is performed as a big hit defeat effect, for example, the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A is disappointed.

  According to the extended production pattern associated with such production commands “01H” and “02H”, the special symbol start timing t0 to the special winning opening release timing t3 (or within the second closing control period). The timing until the jackpot explicit presentation a at the end) functions as one presentation for winning the jackpot, so that the player's gaze point can be directed to such a presentation, It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening when the explicit effect a is being performed, and consequently the small hit.

  In order to obtain these effects, it is necessary to ensure that no information is obtained even if the player confirms that the big prize opening is open. It is important that the configuration is excluded. For example, in a pachinko machine 1 that can execute a big hit game that opens a big winning opening in the same or approximate opening manner as a game per small opening (small hit game), by confirming the opening, It becomes possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the gaming state is changed on condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game that the number of balls that did not match the winning probability with a low jackpot has been won, it is possible to quit the game. It may be a factor that makes it point.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” (for example, whether the specific mission a can be successful (character A) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is displayed when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped as the change time Ta3 elapses. This is completed without extending the production a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”. In addition, even when the decoration symbol changes, at the timing t1 at which the special symbol change is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extension stop state at the time t1 of the extension stop. ing. As for the loss stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode appears in the case of big hit, small hit, and lost.

  Further, the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, and until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta3. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 112A and 112B) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character A who has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown), and the player is made aware that the specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, the effect pattern that continues after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 112 (a), (b), and (d) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development. become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side loses neither a big hit nor a small hit (pure net). Based on the fact that the loss is obtained, the fluctuation relating to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 103 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of losing associated with the effect command “04H” (for example, whether a specific mission a can be successful (character The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents such as whether or not A can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is the non-extended display effect pattern, but when the effect commands are “01H” to “03H”. Even if the timing t1 has arrived due to the elapse of the special symbol fluctuation times ta1 to ta3, the display effect a is not ended (successful or unsuccessful for the specific mission a). . Furthermore, in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern (effect command “04H”), the decoration symbol change is started, but this decoration symbol change is also continued without being terminated at the timing t1. It has become.

  That is, in the case of loss (pure loss), unlike the case of big win or small win, not only the time required for the opening control of the big winning opening, but also the first to maintain this in the closed state prior to the opening of the big winning opening. Since it is immediately shifted to the next variation without preparing the closing control period, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the variation time of the special symbol.

  In this regard, for the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command “04H”, in the main control MPU 4100a, the time from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of a small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the big prize opening Is used as a reference to be adopted when a variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to this is selected. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a display effect a. However, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, but the display effect has a longer time.

  In other words, in this case, regarding the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the variation of any of them is not fixed and stopped at the timing t1 with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension. As in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the extension time at the stage before the passage of the timing t1, which is only an intermediate stage with respect to the change time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the lost stop mode. Then, whether or not the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 is reached while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the suspension stop mode at the time of extension. A continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. It should be noted that the loss stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even though the lottery result and the variation time of the big hit are different between the big hit, the small hit and the lost (pure loss). The mode is adopted, and the display mode is not distinguished.

  And, in this way, the continuation expectation production was successful with the decorative symbol temporarily suspended (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation. The “development display effect a” appears. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuation state again, and the display effect a is applied to the display effect a as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to pay attention to, such as an end portion of the display area), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a stopped state (when it is “01H” to “03H”, temporarily stopped when it is “04H”). Stop) is maintained until timing t2.

  In this “development display effect a”, for example, an appearance as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful, such as the appearance of the character A again facing the enemy within the time of the fluctuation time Ta4, is shown. Done. However, as in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the state in which the specific mission “a” has been successful (the character A is the enemy) until the timing t2 comes. No effect is shown, and only an effect about whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether Character A attacks an enemy and succeeds) appears. ing.

  Then, after the timing t2, the state where the specific mission a has failed is shown until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening in the game per small opening (small winning game) at the time of the production command “02H”. In this way, a clear explicit production a appears. As with the effect command “02H”, for example, the losing explicit effect a shows that the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A regrets. This is done as a defeat. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  In this way, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, a specific lose effect pattern (effect command “ 04H "), when the specific control time (change time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined specific control time (change time Ta4). Display control relating to a specific loss production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. Nonetheless, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a win, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, with respect to the specific lose effect pattern (effect command “04H”) When performing display control related to all winning effect patterns (effect command “01H”), the main control MPU 4100a side determines a variation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific variation time (variation time Ta4). When setting the effect time, not only the determined short fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closing control period, second closing control period) is set. In such a production time, display control for a specific hit production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. It was.

  According to such an effect technique, even in a predetermined interval period after the special symbol is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the winning effect as to whether or not the winning is won and the opening effect. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut so that the effects and games can be advanced, so that it is possible to realize the effect progress (game progress) with a good tempo. In addition, when a display effect pattern of such specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a notable effect element is added to the point of whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle stage, When the suspension is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that the opportunity to acquire a prize ball by opening the special winning opening is given, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, by providing the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” with respect to the extended effect pattern for the effect commands “01H” and “02H”, the “development display effect a” is obtained. The big hit expectation degree when it appears is avoided to have to be set within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, and the small hit is installed Even under such an effect system that makes it difficult to recognize this, it is possible to perform an effect design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, since the special symbol fluctuates after timing t1, there is no problem even when the player confirms the variation state of the special symbol. Absent. And by preparing such a non-extension effect pattern in the form of mixing with the above-mentioned extension effect pattern, even if a special symbol stop state in the extension effect pattern is confirmed, It will be possible to promote awareness that might be mistaken.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, the lower major prize opening 2003 is not opened when the losing explicit effect a is being performed, so the player confirmed the lower major prize opening 2003. There is no problem even if it is a case. Then, by providing such a non-open losing explicit effect a with the lost explicit effect a at the time of the effect command “02H”, the lower winning prize opening 2003 in the losing explicit effect a is provided. Even when the opening is confirmed, it is possible to encourage the player to be aware of the possibility of mistaking it.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “01H”, “02H”, and “04H”, a specific mission a is required until the timing t2 arrives. (Whether or not the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of the timing t2, whether or not the specific mission a is successful (the character A Whether or not to defeat the enemy) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even with such an effect method, the small win time display effect a In addition to the fact that most of the first closing control period is used for the display effect a, after that, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of character A appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such display effects appear when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the probability of winning the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such a gameability (performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. The direct command “01H” to “04H” from the side, as well as the contents of the game itself, and even though there is no change in the normal external disadvantaged game state, By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content that is premised on opening, the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the big prize opening is significantly greater than when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if it had been increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins a big hit when the second production mode is set, the result shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect a ′ at the big hit time associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect a in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to make a specific mission a ′ successful? In this form, a display effect pattern (challenge bonus) with a content such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening is confirmed. It is prepared as a production pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is configured to make the decorative symbol display form different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, whereas the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly composed of characters. In the second effect mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more likely to be noticed.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to be displayed appears, and at the timing t1 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the winning ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening. The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the big prize opening. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect regarding how many prize balls are possible, the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 performs a countdown effect a ′ indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I am doing so.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect a ′ is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed by a right-handed game. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the end of the first closing control period. .

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a ′, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, as shown in FIG. 105A, the end timing t2 of the first closing control period. As soon as the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n after the arrival of, the end timing tx of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the first production mode. Thereby, a challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is indicated which open mode (game per long opening, game per middle opening, game per small opening) is used to open the big prize opening. That is, in this case, the player will not only play the big hit game, but also will play a game ball against the big winning opening at the time of the small opening per game (small hit game), thereby being in the first production mode In comparison, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the chance frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 111 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is continued for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a ′ changes to “0”. It is also assumed that a situation occurs in which the handle portion is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 111 (d) and FIG. 112 (b), it cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 5 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “02H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. At the timing t1 when the display effect a ′ having a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the winning ball can be obtained by opening the winning opening. Become. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. Until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires (first closed control period having a certain length), and when the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n Regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 100).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “02H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”. When the game is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire by using the first closing control period and opening the big prize opening As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect, the operation timing of the operation handle portion is performed as a countdown effect a ′ indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as opening the big winning opening, and the timing at which the variation of the decorative design is started There is no distinction between the contents from t0 until the challenge bonus effect is performed, and when the operation handle is operated as instructed for the effect, the challenge bonus effect is passed from the countdown effect a 'through the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “01H”). Therefore, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by opening the big prize opening. In addition to the games per middle opening, it is possible to display effects regarding which game modes appear including games per small opening. Thereby, compared with the case in the 1st production mode, the game nature (rendering performance) as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening is greatly increased is realized. Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time, and therefore, among the big hits A to E and the small hits, As to whether or not the small win is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

  In this way, the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but the small hit is regarded as a no-chance loss that does not give an opportunity to win a prize ball ( The extended production pattern in the first production mode to be handled (similar to the production pattern (production command “04H”) at the time of pure loss) This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns (challenge bonus effect patterns) in the second effect mode to be handled (similar to the effect pattern at the time of big hit (effect command “01H”)). . In other words, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, thereby enabling a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

  Furthermore, the game per small opening (small game) means that only a small amount of award balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege. Since the game state is not shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed, the gaming interest is reduced even though the opening / closing member 2006 is operated. It can be said that it is necessary to pay attention to the handling in the game setting in that point. Therefore, in the past, when a small hit is installed, a special hit function is performed in which a big hit game is played with a behavior similar to that of a small open per game (small hit game) and thereafter, a transition is made to an advantageous game state First of all, the winning type is prepared, and in the situation where a game per small opening (small winning game) is performed, the player is made aware of the possibility of being a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type Therefore, it has been a major premise to maintain the game entertainment at the time of a small opening game (small hit game). However, even in the case of such a conventional gaming machine, when a specific winning type is won, it is finally won in the big win with a big win probability set in a very low game state. Regardless of this, it is inevitable that there will be a decline in the game entertainment interest (decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the gap between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot) due to the fact that prize balls corresponding to this low probability cannot be obtained. It was.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is configured so that when hitting a small hit, a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and thereafter an advantageous gaming state In the first place, the technical philosophy is different from the conventional gaming machine in order to suppress the decline of the game entertainment at the time of the game per small opening (small winning game) in that the specific winning species that function to shift to It is very different.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the small hit is mounted, the winning type of the big hit is prepared so that a plurality of types of big hit games having different prize ball amounts that can be obtained by the player can be executed. To do. When opening the grand prize opening, first, the lottery result in which the opening of the big prize opening is confirmed in the big hit lottery (a big hit that is expected to win a lot of balls, a big hit that is not so, and a small amount of lottery wins) A display effect is made as to whether or not the expected small hit) is obtained (a challenge bonus effect pattern appears regardless of the type of win). And as a result, when it is shown that the same lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to know that at least a small amount of balls are available. Then, there will be a further challenge bonus effect on how many balls can be added (from a small amount to a medium or large amount). I am doing so.

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). In this respect, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are piled up (a big hit where a large amount of balls are expected to be obtained or a big hit where a medium amount of balls are expected to be obtained), The degree of expectation for operation (probability of transition to a gaming state in which the probability variation function operates) is made different. In other words, in this case, a challenge bonus as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes appear so that the probability of changing to a gaming state in which the probability variation function operates after completion of the opening of the special winning opening appears. It will function as a production. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that a winning probability “3/400” without operation of the condition device is added to a winning probability “1/400” with operation of the condition device. With “1/100”, not only can a prize ball be paid out to a player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also that a game state advantageous to the player can be entered. Can also be made aware.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus production, since it is positioned as a default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, there is a large amount of ball winning according to the winning of the big hit Unlike conventional gaming machines where whether or not a basic game (basic production) is used, even if a small opening per game (small hit game) where a small amount of balls can be obtained is performed, Since the grand prize opening is only opened in conformity with the default performance state, the decline in the game entertainment is suppressed. In addition, when in the second production mode, the probability of appearance of the hit production (probability of entering the challenge bonus) is determined by the fact that a small amount of balls can be obtained is positioned as the default production state. ) Is set to a higher probability (higher probability of winning big wins plus higher probability of winning big hits), and as a result, it is not possible to acquire award balls corresponding to the lower probability. It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

  And in order to be able to have the challenge bonus performance pattern that realizes such games and performance in the second performance mode, not only is the lottery for the small hits performed in the first performance mode, At the time of winning a small hit, the varying times Ta2 to Td2 of the length corresponding to the changing times Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, a small win is not originally required, and a display effect as to whether or not a big hit has been won is basically performed based on the big win probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that is not easily noticed by the player if it is a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a special symbol variation. If you simply adopt the production method that shows the result of the big hit lottery when the stoppage, after the special symbol stops, the opening period when the small opening game (small hit game) is executed and the opening period of the subsequent big prize opening Existence is conspicuous, and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, at the timing t1 (at the end of the variation of the special symbol) when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set. However, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended and is continued. In addition, when entering the first closing control period, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicates an interval indicating that the big prize opening is opened. The set of commands is ignored without switching to the effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. When the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts at timing t2, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It is executed in such a manner that it is switched to a winning clarification effect indicating whether or not (hit a big hit), and an opening effect.

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as one effect that appears at the time of the loss of the big hit, and after the special symbol is stopped, the first closing at the time of executing the game per small opening (small hit game) By performing it over the control period and the subsequent opening period of the big prize opening, it will be a display effect for the next fluctuation (special symbol hold-up) relatively soon after it is shown that it is a big win. Can be migrated. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, because the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called highly anticipated loss production. This makes it difficult to notice, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating in accordance with the winning of the small hit.

  And in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is in particular the first effect mode as described above. And a mode forcing control means for creating a mode forcing period that is forcibly determined to be one of the effect modes of the second and the second effect modes and is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode. ing. Then, a first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined as the first production mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the control related to the creation of the mode forcing period is performed so that the second predetermined period (for example, the next one month) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, the hall side conceals this from the player even though the small hits are mounted by the appearance of the extended effect pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. In addition, by performing win display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the basis of the jackpot winning probability “1/400”, a prize ball is awarded to the player with the jackpot winning probability “1/400”. The first game-specific pachinko machine that can be paid out can be started (first newly opened store). In addition, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses in this way, not only a big hit but also a small win is treated as one kind of hit as a winning ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening. The above-mentioned challenge bonus performance pattern appears, and in combination with the fact that it is difficult to notice the presence of a small hit in the first predetermined period, a probability higher than the winning probability “1/400” of the big hit Based on “1/100”, the winning display is performed in the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in this case, a prize ball can be paid out to the player with a higher probability “1/100” obtained by adding the winning probability “3/400” of the big hit to the winning probability “1/400” of the big hit. The operation of a new pachinko machine with a second game specification can be started (second new store opening). As a result, while the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine that has not only the contents of the effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the game specifications related to the appearance of the game is newly operated. Such an impression can be given to the player.

  Furthermore, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless a predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and it is determined that it is at a specific date (second predetermined period). The change control from the first production mode is not permitted, and some production modes (second production mode) of the plurality of production modes are still hidden without appearing. Will be performed. In other words, in this case, as the month and day have passed since the pachinko machine 1 was delivered to the hall, the production functions that were hidden until then were gradually exposed. Since the rendered performance function can be selectively used by the player's operation, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1). When started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. Then, a display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggling by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) Accordingly, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “03H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a at the time of the big hit in which the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a deviation in the production time at, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production a at the time of big hit, and the contents of the display production a develop. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “01H” is “non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern). ) ”, There is no deviation in the production time with the same production pattern (production command“ 01H ”), and the production pattern (production command“ 01H ") will function as an effect pattern at the time of losing (an effect pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hit at the effect command “02H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line) appears, the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined symbol) for this effect pattern (effect command “02H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither a big win nor a small win (pure net). Based on the fact that the loss has been obtained, the fluctuation relating to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. Is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 dynamically displays a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H”. Is started.

  That is, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H” has the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit when the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “03H” is in the first effect mode. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the effect pattern (effect command “01H”), this (effect pattern at the time of losing when in the first effect mode) should be compensated. It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” is the “non-extension effect pattern” when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H”. The production time with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit (the production command “01H”) will be shifted, and the production with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit It cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the pattern.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” and the fluctuation time Tc2 when the fluctuation number is “10” shown in FIG. In this case, the variation time having the same length as the variation time Ta4 is prepared. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, a display effect pattern described later (see FIG. 106A) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” is “non-display”. Since it appears as an “extended display effect pattern”, there is no deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command “09H”). Therefore, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” is displayed. By starting the dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus) at the time of the loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern that does not appear on a predetermined symbol line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started, for example, such a decorative pattern is displayed at the variation time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ appears with a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” appears when a specific loss variation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It is possible to function as each display display pattern for the big hit display effect patterns of the two types of effect contents a and c ′, and functions as a display display effect pattern for any of the big hit display effect patterns. Whether to do this is selectively set based on whether the first effect mode or the second effect mode is set. As a result, for the two big hit effect commands “01H” and “09H”, the big hit effect commands “01H” are in the first production mode and in the second production mode. , The appearance probability of the loss display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of “09H” can be changed.

  More specifically, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the lose effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Further, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, various display effects patterns with different degrees of expectation can be made to appear in accordance with the effect modes without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step (see FIG. 114).

  The reason why such a special effect can be realized is that an effect command in which the length of each effect is adjusted by using the special symbol stop timing t3 as the effect time for one loss variation time Ta4. While having a big hit effect pattern of “09H” and a variation time Ta1 shorter than the loss variation time Ta4, at least the first closed control period after symbol stoppage is added and used as the effect time. A jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the effect command “01H” in which the length of the command is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the big hit effect pattern with the effect time adjusted in this way, the big hit effect patterns of the effect commands “01H” and “09H” having different change times Ta1 and Tc1 are associated with one loss change time Ta4. When this loss variation time Ta4 is selected, it becomes possible to determine which production contents a and c ′ appear on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side. Furthermore, even if such a first closing control period added as the production time is won for winning the big winning opening (big hit or small win), it has a fixed length regardless of the type. It is also important to set the time having a time (for example, 8 seconds) in order to realize such a special effect especially including the effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 113 is a time chart illustrating an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” illustrated in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 103 is based on the fact that the big win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect c (for example, a specific mission c) associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not can be made successful (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc1 has arrived. The display effect c is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission c to succeed or fail).

  That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” shown in FIG. 103 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 when the fluctuation number is “4”. However, when the first production mode is set, such an “extended production pattern” is adopted, and the production time with the production pattern (production command “04H”) is shifted. Is to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the first production mode, there is a production relevance (a big hit production pattern, a loss production) with the display production pattern when the variation number is “4”. Pattern) is not given.

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the stoppage of the special symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the decoration symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Tc1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, the display effect c (development, loss), which will be described later, associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. 103 is prepared, so that the display effect c even when the timing t3 has elapsed. This will function as “development display effect c (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission c)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect c” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being maintained in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after the final stoppage. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to pay attention to such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the display effect c. However, it is more desirable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be successful without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, the actual effect is not displayed in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped. However, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has succeeded (for example, a character C who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has risen). Under the circumstances, the “development display effect c” appears. In this “development display effect c”, for example, using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, for example, a situation in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission c can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect c (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission c can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command “10H”. As described above, when the player is in the first presentation mode, the display presentation c (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to notice that the small hit is the pachinko machine 1 mounted. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, a specific time until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives. The state of success in the mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the effect on whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) Production such as whether or not) appears. As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect c can appear in such a manner that the specific mission c is successful after the opening effect end timing t4, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H”. Will function as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c”.

  However, as described above, in the extended performance pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. Two closing control periods appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit indication c) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (timing ty), the second closing control period As a result, the jackpot game and the effect during the jackpot game are started. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 104A, the second closing control period from the timing t4 to the timing ty is ended based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Therefore, for example, as soon as the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the effective gate 6010n is moved to the game ball by operating the operation handle portion 410. When the game is played so that the game passes, the big hit explicit production c and the opening production are cut at that time, or the production itself is almost not appeared (the production is skipped), and the next production (production during the big hit game) is forced. It will be progressed.

  On the other hand, based on the fact that the small win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 103) is selected. Assuming that a change on a special symbol with a description (which will be described as being set at the same time as Tc1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is associated with the effect command “10H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the contents of the display effect c at the time of a small hit (for example, whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (whether the character C can defeat the enemy), etc.) Be started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 106A) associated with the effect command “09H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not ended (the specific mission c is not succeeded or failed). ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative pattern is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”. In addition, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “09H” (FIG. 106) also includes the point of finalizing and stopping at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the big win lottery result for the big hit and the small hit, a single display mode is adopted, and the display mode is distinguished. What has not been done is as described above.

  Furthermore, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for c, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. This is the same as the extended production pattern (see FIG. 113A) associated with the production command “09H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, Actually, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, such an expectation that the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successful (for example, a character C who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has stood up). Under the feeling, “development display effect c” appears. In the “development display effect c”, for example, a state in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect is made as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successful.

  Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, a state in which the specific mission c is successful (the character C defeats the enemy) is not shown. An effect about whether or not the mission c can be successful (an effect such as whether or not the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 111 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Accordingly, after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t5 of the control related to the opening of the lower big prize opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “10H”, The losing explicit effect c appears in the form of a state in which the specific mission c has failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c”.

  In this losing explicit effect c, for example, as a big hit defeat effect different from the losing explicit effect a, for example, an attack by the character C is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character C is regretted. Done.

  According to the extended effect pattern associated with such effect commands “09H” and “10H”, the special symbol start timing t0 to the special winning opening end timing t5 (or within the second closing control period). The time until the jackpot explicit presentation c at the end of the game will function as one presentation for winning the big hit, so that the player's gaze point can be directed to such a presentation, It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a large winning opening when the explicit effect c is being performed, and thus a small hit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, a specific mission c can be made successful (character C) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c thus started is displayed when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc3 has arrived. This is ended without extending the production c (in the form of failing a specific mission c).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”. In addition, even when the decoration symbol changes, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extension stop state when the extension symbol is stopped with the suspension stop mode when extended. ing.

  Further, the display effect c in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc3 under the temporary stop in the manner of stopping the loss when the decorative symbol is extended. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 113A and 113B) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character C that has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown), and the player is made aware that the specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t3 shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, whether or not the specific mission c has been successful until the timing t4 has arrived even in the display effect pattern when the effect commands are “09H” and “10H”. Whether or not (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of timing t4, whether or not a specific mission c was successful (whether character C defeated the enemy) Or not) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even in such an effect method, the small win time display effect c is the small hit time. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period is used for the display effect c, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of the character C appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the probability of winning the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such a gameability (performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even if any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. The direct command “09H” to “11H” from the side, as well as the contents of the game itself, is not a change in the normal external disadvantaged game state, but the winning prize winning by winning the small hit By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content that is premised on opening, the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the big prize opening is significantly greater than when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if it had been increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a side has won a big hit when the second production mode is set, as shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect c ′ at the big hit time associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect c ′ in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to make a specific mission c ′ successful? In this form, the display effect pattern (challenge bonus) with contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening is confirmed. It is prepared as a production pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) at the time of the effect command “09H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is used as the bonus challenge stop symbol in the variation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives. A display effect c ′ having a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with the stop display mode that appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the prize ball is opened by opening the big prize opening. In order to make it possible for the player to grasp that an opportunity for acquisition is given, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be obtained by the player by opening the big prize opening using the first closing control period. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect c ′ regarding the number of prize balls to be determined, the operation timing of the operation handle part performs a countdown effect c ′ indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I am doing so.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect c ′ is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed by a right-handed game. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the end of the first closing control period. . However, as will be described later, since the countdown effect c ′ has a different expectation from the countdown effect a ′ described above, the content of the effect is different from each other (for example, the background color is different). I have to.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c ′, when the operation handle is operated as instructed by the effect, the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives as shown in FIG. 113 (a). As soon as the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n, the end timing ty of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the case of the first production mode. Thereby, a challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is indicated which open mode (game per long opening, game per middle opening, game per small opening) is used to open the big prize opening. That is, in this case, the player will not only play the big hit game, but also will play a game ball against the big winning opening at the time of the small opening per game (small hit game), thereby being in the first production mode In comparison, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the chance frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 111 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c ′ changes to “0”. It is also assumed that a situation where the handle portion 410 is not operated occurs. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 111 (d) and FIG. 113 (b), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 1 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “10H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when a display effect c 'appears with an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. Until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires (first closed control period having a certain length), and when the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n Regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 100).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “10H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”. When the game is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire by using the first closing control period and opening the big prize opening As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect, a countdown effect c ′ in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as opening the big winning opening, and the timing at which the variation of the decorative design is started The contents of the production from the time t0 until the challenge bonus production is performed are not distinguished, and when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the production, the challenge bonus is passed from the countdown production c ′ through the preceding production (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effects as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “09H”). Therefore, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by opening the big prize opening. In addition to the games per middle opening, it is possible to display effects regarding which game modes appear including games per small opening. Thereby, compared with the case in the 1st production mode, the game nature (rendering performance) as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening is greatly increased is realized. Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time, and therefore, among the big hits A to E and the small hits, As to whether or not the small win is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “10H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but the small hit is treated as a no-chance loss that does not give an opportunity to win a prize ball. The extended effect pattern in the first effect mode, and the small win is treated as a hit of a high chance to be given a chance to win a prize ball (similar to the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) at the time of a big hit) This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode. In other words, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, thereby enabling a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “11H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit when the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a shift in the production time at the stage, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production c at the time of the big hit, and the contents of the display production c are developed. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” appears as the “non-extended display effect pattern”. For the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit without causing any deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (the effect command “09H”). It will function as an effect pattern at the time of the loss (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the effect command “10H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (the bonus challenge stop pattern appears as a production pattern that appears on a predetermined design line), the production pattern (the bonus challenge stop design is a predetermined pattern) for this production pattern (production command “10H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

  Thus, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H” corresponds to the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 112 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is shown in FIG. 112 (c). The production command corresponds to the display production pattern when the production command is “03H”, and although the production contents differ from each other, the production series addressed to itself (production contents a series, production contents) c series) function as production patterns having substantially the same role.

  However, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” in the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”) is prepared. Not. That is, in the production content c series, if a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” is prepared, in the first production pattern, the display production pattern corresponding to the production command “09H” is displayed. Although it can function effectively as a loss display effect pattern, the second effect pattern cannot function as a display loss effect pattern for the display effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”. Therefore, despite being given a relatively long time, there was a display effect pattern dedicated to losing without the jackpot symbol combination appearing, and we were worried that this might reduce the entertainment interest of this game Is.

  Therefore, when in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”, as the lose effect pattern, the effect pattern at the time of losing (pure loss) that does not satisfy a specific condition is adopted. Only the effect pattern when the specific condition is satisfied (the display effect pattern when the effect command is “10H”) functions as the only presence in place of the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss) To come. That is, in this case, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), unlike the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”), “development display production c” appears. The big hit expectation degree at that time must be set within a range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. However, the production content c of the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”) has a longer time than the production content a of the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”). As the jackpot expectation degree, it is executed as an effect with a higher expectation than the effect content a. Therefore, the expectation degree of big hit when the “development display effect c” appears, even if it is within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, this is required as an appropriate value described later. Setting is relatively easy.

  In addition, regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” in the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”), the effect content a is in the second effect mode. By functioning as a loss effect pattern for the hit effect pattern (effect commands “09H”, “10H”) of the effect content c series, not the hit effect pattern of the series (effect commands “01H”, “02H”) As described above, it is avoided that the jackpot symbol combination does not appear as a display effect pattern dedicated to losing. Therefore, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), when in the second production mode, the winning production patterns (production commands “09H” and “10H”) are prepared. The lost effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the lost effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) to the extent that the display effect pattern selection probability of the effect command “04H” is added.

  Although details are omitted, the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. Display having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 112 (a) to (d)) respectively associated with the a series effect commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, the display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 103 are the effect commands “09H”, It is set as a display effect pattern having the same form as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 113A to 113C) associated with “10H” and “11H”, respectively. That is, each display effect pattern associated with each of the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 103 and the effect content d shown in FIG. The production relations between the display production patterns associated with the series production commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” are the production commands “01H”, “02H”, Each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 112 (a) to (d)) respectively associated with “03H” and “04H”, and effect commands “09H”, “10H”, “11H” of the effect content c series. Are set so as to have the above-described effect relationship with each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (c)).

  FIG. 113 (a) is a table showing the jackpot expectation degree when in the first effect mode, for each effect content series, and FIG. 113 (b) is a challenge when in the second effect mode. It is a table | surface which shows a bonus rush expected degree etc. according to each production content series, respectively. In addition, about the numerical value which shows a probability, since the 2nd decimal place is rounded off and it has shown as a numerical value to the 1st decimal place, the probability total value of each element may not become 100%.

  According to the setting aspect concerning such a display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the big hit expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the win effect appears in the first effect mode, The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “0.5%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is “1.5%”. The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “13.7%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is “33.1%”. When the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, the big hit expectation is “100%”, which is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect contents e, a confirmed effect that the big hit is won appears regardless of the effect mode.

  Further, regarding the big hit expectation degree (expectation degree at which the hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in the developed stage, when the developed effect content a appears The big hit expectation degree of "1.3%", the big hit expectation degree when the development content b after development appears "3.7%", the big hit when the development content c after development appears The degree of expectation is “25%”, and the degree of expectation for jackpot when the production content d after development appears is “72.7%”.

  On the other hand, with respect to the challenge bonus entry expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the winning effect appears in the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. 113B, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears. The challenge bonus entry expectation degree is “7.9%”, the challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%”, and the effect content c ′ is displayed. The challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the effect pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the jackpot effect patterns (effect command “01H”, effect command “05H” set as the extended effect patterns. ”), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) that can only function as a loss effect pattern when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H” and the effect command “08H”) prepared in this way is used in the second effect mode. 09H ”, the production command“ 10H ”) and the effect content d ′ for the hit production pattern (the production command“ 12H ”, the production command“ 13H ”).

  According to the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H”, when in the first effect mode, the expectation that a win effect appears including the developed effect contents a and b. Although the degree (expected degree of jackpot) is lowered, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d), thereby It can be avoided that only display effect patterns that cannot be expected are repeatedly performed. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability is low including the effect contents c and d after development, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree of expectation (expected degree of jackpot) is increased (with respect to each display effect pattern of effect contents a and b), and thereby the game entertainment when a specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears. Can be improved.

  Conversely, the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H” is used as a display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series is increased by that amount (operation on the appearance probability). As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of appearance between the contents a to d and the expectation level at which the hit effect appears, as compared with the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side is reduced. Even if it is not changed one by one, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects.

  Moreover, the display effect associated with the effect commands “04H” and “08H” regarding the disparity between the effect contents regarding the expectation level (challenge bonus entry expectation degree) at which the winning effect appears when in the second effect mode. In addition to the fact that the pattern is used as a display effect pattern for the production contents c and d series, as well as being a big hit as a win that can be won by opening the big prize opening, as a kind of the small hit It is further reduced by being handled (operation to reduce the disparity in expectation level where a hit effect appears).

  According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively likely to appear regardless of the type of the effect contents a ′ to d ′. Become. In addition, the entry probability (probability of execution of the winning effect) of the challenge bonus effect in which the granting of the opportunity for winning the prize ball is confirmed will be more equal than in the first effect mode (here, the contents of the effect) a) to d ′) (within a range of ± 10%), even if any production content a ′ to d ′ appears due to the above-mentioned gap in the appearance probability being filled It becomes easier for a person to expect that an opportunity for winning a prize ball will be given.

  In this regard, when in the second production mode, when entering (execution) the challenge bonus production, “the big prize opening is released in any manner (game per long open, game per medium open, game per small open) Since the effects such as “Ruka” are characterized, the display effects patterns of the contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively easier to appear than the cases where they appear to be biased to any one. It is more desirable to suppress the decline of interest.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ according to this embodiment, the effect content a ′ is the most about the appearance probability of the game per long and middle opening. It becomes smaller and gradually becomes larger in the order of the production contents b ′, c ′, d ′. In addition, with regard to the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the production content a ′ is the largest, and gradually decreases in the order of the production content b ′, c ′, and d ′. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears, although the possibility that the big winning opening is opened by the game per small opening is certainly high, at least a small amount of prize balls (in this embodiment, As a production of colors with a sense of expectation that the big prize opening will be opened by games per long opening and games per middle opening You will be able to enjoy it. Further, when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears, the probability that the big prize opening is opened by the game per long opening or the game per middle opening, the probability that the big winning opening is opened by the game per small opening Because it is higher than that, it is decided that at least a small amount of prize balls can be acquired as a privilege, rather than a big prize opening is opened by games per long opening or games per middle opening It will function as an effect of shades such as whether or not. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ each function as an effect having a hue between the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ and the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. The display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′, and the display effect pattern of the effect content c ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. Is darker. Therefore, the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ are all relatively likely to appear, so that the player can enjoy the effects of various shades.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-described operation for reducing the disparity in expectation level at which the hit effect appears between the contents is smaller than that in the first effect mode is expected to show the hit effect. The degree relationship is to be reversed depending on the production mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and (b), when in the first production mode, the expectation degrees of the production contents b and c are “1.5%” and “13”, respectively. .7% ”, which is smaller than the expectation level“ 33.1% ”of the production content d, while the expectation level of the production contents b ′ and c ′ is in the second production mode. They are “11.8%” and “15.4%”, respectively, and are larger than the expectation degree “10%” of the production content d ′. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  However, when the production pattern of the production content d ′ appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the winning production (challenge bonus production) is executed is certainly greater than when the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′ appears. Although it is low, as long as you enter the challenge bonus production, the winning prize opening will be opened with a game with a higher probability than the production pattern b ', c' production pattern, long per middle opening, It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the production patterns of the production contents b ′ and c ′ and the production pattern of the production content d ′ are divided according to the player, and such various shades are given depending on the display production pattern. As a result, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  Next, an example of an effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the big prize opening is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 103, FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 113 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first effect mode, the effect content depends on the type of jackpot. There is no difference and the type is not shown, and the control for opening the big winning opening (in this case, the control for the big hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first effect mode, the type of jackpot and the period are ended using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening is performed. An effect that can indicate the game state after the game is performed is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103, FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 113 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second production mode, the opportunity to open the lower major prize opening 2003 is opened. Depending on the type of winning, the content of the production does not differ, and the type is not shown, and the control for opening the big prize opening is kept secret (in this case, the big hit game or the small hit game) Control) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second presentation mode, the type of winning (big hit, small hit is made using the period when the control for opening the big winning opening is performed. , The type of jackpot), the gaming state after the end of the period, and the like, the above-described challenge bonus effect is performed.

  In other words, in the opening effect (challenge bonus effect) in the second effect mode, first, in what form (game per long opening, game per medium opening, game per small opening) is opened. An effect is shown in which information (such as a big bonus, a regular bonus, or a small bonus) related to the amount of balls is shown. As a result, when it is shown that the big winning opening is opened by the game per long opening (big bonus), it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state that can be expected to be promising based on the winning of the big hit A. It will be shown by itself. In addition, when it is shown that the lower prize winning opening 2003 is opened by a game per small opening (small bonus), it is naturally indicated that the winning is a small winning and the gaming state is not changed. It will be.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent production state is limited to a period until a special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that it is in a probable external disadvantaged game state, while when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am doing so. When the character wins in this battle effect, it indicates that the player has won the jackpot, and when the character is defeated, the player is normally in an external disadvantaged game state, and waits for the end of the same period. The latent production state is terminated without any problem.

  As described above, according to the latent effect technique in which the current gaming state is indicated until the period until the special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, as a player, It becomes easy to enjoy whether the game state is in the game state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time-saving function is not activated.

  By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 112A, the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 103 when in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a”. 115 ", but as shown in FIG. 115, in addition to the" extended effect pattern ", a" non-extended display effect pattern "having the contents of the display effect a is also associated. It may be.

  That is, in this case, when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 103 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the “extended effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of the “non-extended display effect patterns” having the contents is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern.

  Here, as a technique for selecting the “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect “a” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect “a”, for example, A method of selecting either an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery based (B) Based on the type of jackpot won in the jackpot lottery, an “extended display pattern” having the contents of the display effect a and a “non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a In addition to a method of selecting any of “,” a method combining (A) and (B), or the like can be employed.

  Of these, when the method (a) is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are associated with the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern”, respectively. In the first effect mode, the “extended effect” having the contents of the display effect a when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 103 is received in the first effect mode. The appearance probabilities of “pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of display effect a are determined. Regarding the setting of the appearance probability, it is important that the expectation of jackpot is higher when the “extended display pattern” appears than the “non-extended display pattern”. It is more desirable to entertain.

  Further, when the method (b) is adopted, when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, the dynamic of the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a The display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such a production method, at a timing t1, a winning result for at least a specific winning type (for example, big hit A) is displayed.

  For example, when a jackpot symbol (a jackpot demonstrating effect that clearly indicates a big hit) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous for the player. In the first closed control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs an opening effect such as “Congratulations!” To congratulate the player. For example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, it is effective if the display is switched to the effect display indicating that the big hit game should be started by the right-handed game. The timing tx when the game ball passes through the gate 6010n is likely to arrive relatively earlier than in the case of the extended display effect pattern, and in the subsequent big hit game, a special big hit effect dedicated to the “big hit A” is performed. Become. However, when a hit effect (a big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates a big hit) does not appear at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A, which is the most advantageous for the player” It will be possible to grasp that it is not won. And in this case, when the big hit clarification effect appears through the above-mentioned continuation expectation effect by the “extended effect pattern”, it becomes possible to grasp that any other is won.

  Further, when adopting a method combining (A) and (B), an effect lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and based on the acquired random number value while referring to the effect lottery table. Thus, either an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a is selected. In other words, by providing an effect lottery table for each type of jackpot, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of “extended effect pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” different in each table. Thereby, for example, the expectation of the type of jackpot that has been won is made different depending on whether it is clearly indicated that the jackpot is won by either “extended effect pattern” or “non-extended display effect pattern”. In addition to the fact that the “non-extension production pattern” has a lower jackpot expectation, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is higher when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit. , “Expansion effect pattern” has a higher jackpot expectation, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is lower. Is also possible.

  As for the method related to the selection of “extended effect pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern”, in addition to the display effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the effect command “05H” shown in FIG. The display effects patterns “09H” and “12H” can be similarly adopted. However, when the effect commands “01H” and “05H” are used as the display effect patterns, the display effect patterns “03H” and “07H” are lost to the display effect pattern as the winning effect pattern. It can function as a pattern.

  In the example described above with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 103 when in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a”. ”, But as shown in FIG. 106, in addition to the“ extended effect pattern ”, an“ extended effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect c may also be associated. Good.

  That is, in the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c” associated with the effect command “02H”, the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. The content of the effect is not only the display effect pattern of the effect command “11H” when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 113 (c)), but the display effect after development in which the jackpot expectation is higher. It will be the production contents that do not appear. Therefore, when the production command “02H” shown in FIG. 103 is received in the first production mode, a part of the production command is assigned to the production contents in which the developed display production does not appear. In addition, it is possible to set the winning probability for small hitting higher while keeping the appearance probability of the display effect after development in the first effect mode low. In this case, when in the second production mode, the probability of entry into the challenge bonus production (the expectation level at which the bonus production appears) will be increased by the amount set for the higher probability of winning the small hit. This makes it possible to give a chance of winning a prize ball by opening the Shimodai prize opening 2003 with a higher probability.

  In this case, in the first effect mode, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 103 is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a” and the “display effect”. One of the “extended effect patterns having the contents of c” is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern. In addition, as a method for selecting the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a” and the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c”, for example, as a result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting either “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” or “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”. When this method is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect a” and “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect c”. The content of “display effect a” when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 103 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values associated in advance. The appearance probabilities of “extended effect pattern having“ and the extended effect pattern having the contents of display effect c ”are determined.

  In addition, regarding the technique related to the selection of “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” and “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”, the display effect pattern of the above-described effect command “02H” is used. In addition, the display effect pattern of the effect command “06H” shown in FIG. 103 can be similarly adopted. When this effect command “06H” is adopted as the display effect pattern, the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect b” and the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect d” are selected. It becomes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number “15”, production command “15H”) shown in FIG. 103 for determining the big hit is prepared. You may omit it. That is, in this case, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear when the big winning opening is opened in the second effect mode.

  By the way, in the case where the processing pattern of the game at the time of the big hit is triggered by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n when starting the accessory continuous operation device (in the case of the aforementioned challenge bonus), the small hit is originally There is a problem that when a player is won, it is easily recognized that the player is not a big hit. That is, in the case of a big hit with the operation of the condition device, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the game ball guiding path unit 6050, the game ball is guided to the effective gate 6010n, and passes through it, thereby continuing the role. The actuator is activated and the grand prize opening is opened. In this way, in the big hit with the operation of the condition device, the operation of the continuous action device is left to the player's timing, whereas in the case of a small hit without the operation of the condition device, the game ball Regardless of whether or not passes through the effective gate 6010n, that is, even if the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, the special winning opening is opened after the first closed control period having a certain length. Will be. Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display device 1400 (top plate side liquid crystal display device 244) is instructed to be right-handed, whether or not the player intentionally makes a right-handed player, or a right-handed player with a delay The player who is trying to make it can easily determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small win.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, and the advance effect (notice) before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. (Direction) was executed. Therefore, the player expects the preceding effect regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small win, and immediately makes a right turn based on the teaching of the liquid crystal display device. The game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n within the first closed control period. As a result, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the winning ball is opened (opened for a short period) after the right-handed game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a game ball guiding path unit 6050 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a so that all the right-handed game balls are supplied to the game ball guiding path unit 6050. Since the entrance end of the game ball guiding path unit 6050 is opened at the upper right of the game area 5a, the game ball that has been hit right and reaches the right side of the game area 5a enters the immediate game ball guiding path unit 6050. . Thereafter, the game ball always passes through the effective gate 6010n after passing through the effect gate 6011 immediately below the opening of the game ball guiding path unit 6050. Therefore, although the game ball has not passed through the effective gate 6010n at the stage where the game ball has passed through the effect gate 6011, the game machine may perform an effect that precedes the game ball passing through the effective gate. Become.

  As described above, the falling speed of the game ball is moderated by the game ball guide path unit, so that the game ball spends a predetermined time and passes through the game ball guide path unit 6050 to be an effective gate below the game ball guide path unit. Up to 6010n. In this way, the gaming machine earns this time because it can earn time compared to the case where the game ball falls freely before passing the effect gate 6010n after passing the effect gate 6011. Use the time to improve the quality of the performance by taking a sufficiently long processing time for various effects such as the preceding effect, suggestion effect, notice selection, etc. that are generated when the game ball passes the effect gate 6011. can do.

  The gaming machine described above includes a pair of light guide plates 1400A that can move the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the left and right. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of a game board provided with the light guide plate 1400A as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a front view of the game board.

  Next, the light guide plate will be described. A rectangular light guide plate 1400A is provided on the front surface or the rear surface of the movable region of the movable accessory on the front surface of the liquid crystal display unit 1400 (viewing region) (see FIGS. 117 and 118). The light guide plate 1400A is a translucent plate such as transparent acrylic or transparent glass, and the player can recognize the decorative symbols and display effects displayed in the viewing area of the liquid crystal display unit 1400 via the light guide plate. ing. A dot pattern (uneven portion) for recording display information such as characters, designs or patterns is formed on the flat surface (surface) of the light guide plate. Therefore, when the projection light (emitted light, irradiation light) from the light source enters the light guide plate on the side end surfaces other than the front and back surfaces of the light guide plate, the light is front side of the light guide plate according to the dot pattern. The display information is expressed by refraction.

  The dot pattern is configured to be able to display display information in a plurality of different modes depending on the direction of the emitted light with respect to the light guide plate. For example, the light emitted from the light source toward the side end surface of the light guide plate and the light emitted from the light source toward the lower end surface of the light guide plate have different directions and angles with respect to the light guide plate, and different images are respectively displayed on the light guide plate. (See JP 2006-75362 A). As the light source, for example, a light emitting element such as a full color LED can be used.

  Next, a drive mechanism for moving the light guide plate will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 119 to 122, the light guide plate drive mechanism includes a pair of transparent light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 that can move left and right on the front surface of the liquid crystal display panel 1400-1, and a drive device for these light guide plates 10000 and a guide device 10002 for the light guide plate. FIG. 119 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pair of left and right light guide plates are most separated from each other on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display panel. FIG. 120 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pair of left and right light guide plates starts to move toward the center of the liquid crystal display panel. FIG. 121 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pair of left and right light guide plates further moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display panel. FIG. 122 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pair of left and right light guide plates further move toward the center of the liquid crystal display panel and are closest to each other. In FIGS. 119 to 122, arrows indicate the moving directions of the left and right light guide plates 1400 </ b> A- 1 and 1400 </ b> A- 2.

  The above-described guide mechanism 10002 has an overall “U” shape, and includes left and right vertical portions 10004 facing the side surfaces of the light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 and a horizontal portion 10006 facing the lower surface of the light guide plate. Yes. Both the vertical portion 10004 and the horizontal portion 10006 are formed in a rectangular shape so that the inner surface of the light guide plate can accommodate the end surface portion of the light guide plate while allowing the light guide plate to move.

  As shown in FIG. 119, in a state where the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 are farthest from each other (first state), each of the left and right light guide plates is connected to the vertical portion 10004 of the guide device 10002. Department is housed. As shown in FIG. 124, the vertical portion 10004 of the guide device 10002 includes a first light source device 10100 that faces the side end face of the light guide plate while approaching. 123 is a perspective view showing an inner surface of the vertical portion 10004 and a partially enlarged view thereof, and FIG. 124 is an assembled perspective view of the vertical portion 10004 and the first light source device 10100. The first light source device 10100 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 10010 arranged in a line, and the arrangement length of the plurality of light emitting elements is equal to or greater than the length of the side end surface of the light guide plate. The projection light is supplied into the light guide plate over the entire length of the side end face of the light guide plate. A partition wall 10016 that partitions the light guide plate and the liquid crystal panel 1400-1 extends in the length direction on the inner surface of the vertical portion 10004, and the side edge of the liquid crystal panel 1400-1 is on the inner surface 10014 adjacent to the partition wall. It comes into contact with and is supported. Note that the liquid crystal panel 1400-1 may be assembled separately from the light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2. The light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 and the liquid crystal panel are disposed with a predetermined gap therebetween.

  Reference numeral 10012 denotes a connector for a plurality of light emitting elements. Even if the alignment of the light guide plate and the light source device may not be correctly performed due to the arrangement length of the light emitting elements being equal to or larger than the size of the light guide plate, all the images to be displayed on the light guide plate from the light source device are displayed. Light is projected onto the end face of the light guide plate so that the light spreads.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the horizontal portion 10006 of the guide device 10002 guides the movement of the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 in the left-right direction. In a state where the left and right light guide plates are closest to each other in the center region of the liquid crystal display panel (FIG. 122: second state), the inner surface of the horizontal portion 10006 faces evenly while approaching the lower end surfaces of the left and right light guide plates. Thus, a second light source device 10200 is provided (FIG. 125). 125 is an exploded perspective view of the second light source device 10200 and the horizontal portion 10006. FIG. The second light source device 10200 also includes a plurality of light emitting elements 10010 arranged in a row, and the arrangement length of the plurality of light emitting elements is equal to or greater than the total length of the lower end surfaces of the left and right light guide plates. The horizontal portion 10006 includes a concave portion 10104 in which the lower end surfaces of the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 are slidably accommodated. You may provide the 2nd recessed part for fixing liquid crystal panel 1400-1. The guide device described above is fixed to the game board 5.

  In FIG. 123, reference numeral 10017 denotes a stopper that regulates the movement of the light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 in the direction away from each other. The stopper 10017 is composed of a pair of ridges facing each other, and the left and right light guide plates are arranged so that the side end surfaces of the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 do not contact the optical element 10010 facing them. Even in the state of being farthest from each other, the positional relationship between the light guide plate and the plurality of light emitting elements facing the side end surfaces of the light guide plate can be appropriately maintained.

  Next, the drive device 10000 for the left and right light guide plates will be described. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the driving device 10000 and the left light guide plate 1400A-1 as seen from the liquid crystal display region side. 127 and 128 are perspective views of the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2, the driving device 10000, and the guide device 10002 as seen from the back, and FIG. 128 shows the crystal panel 1400-1 in the illustration. Omitted.

  The driving device 10000 is between the position of the light guide plate (first position) in the first state (FIG. 119) and the position of the light guide plate (second position) in the second state (FIG. 122). The pair of light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 are moved simultaneously or separately. A flange 10201 extends at right angles from the upper end surface of the light guide plate toward the liquid crystal display unit along the upper end surfaces of the left and right light guide plates. A rack 10202 is formed on the upper surface of the flange along the width direction of the light guide plate.

  A base plate 10208 for fixing a pair of left and right stepping motors 10204 and 10206 is provided above the light guide plate. A pinion 10210 is fixed to the tip of each motor (FIG. 126), and the pinion 10210 is configured to be able to mesh with a rack 10202 of a light guide plate through a rectangular opening 10212 of the base plate. The pinion of the left motor 10204 is connected to the rack 10202 of the left light guide plate 1400A-1, and the pinion of the right motor 10206 is connected to the rack 10202 of the right light guide plate 1400A-2. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 can move the left and right light guide plates to the left and right in front of the liquid crystal viewing area simultaneously or separately by a pair of left and right motors.

  As shown in FIG. 119, when the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 are in the first position, the left and right light guide plates are farthest apart, and the central region 10050 of the liquid crystal display region is blocked by the light guide plate. Display information directly reaches the player. Since the light guide plate is transparent, the liquid crystal display information is visible even after passing through the light guide plate, but the liquid crystal display information may become unclear due to the dot pattern formed on the light guide plate. When the left and right light guide plates are in the first position, since the approximately half of the liquid crystal display area of the left and right light guide plates near the center is located in front of the liquid crystal display area, information 10040, 10042 (girl image) is visible to the player. The remaining approximately half of the left and right light guide plates are located, for example, on the back of the center accessory. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122, when the left and right light guide plates are in the second position, the left and right light guide plates cover the substantially entire surface of the liquid crystal display region in a state of being closest to each other on the front surface of the liquid crystal display region. It has become.

  The light emitted from the light emitting element 10010 (see FIG. 123) of the first light source device 10100 enters the light guide plate along the width direction (left-right direction) of the light guide plate from the side end surface of the light guide plate. The light that has entered the light guide plate is diffracted to the front side (player side) by the dot pattern, and as shown in FIG. 119, a small image of girl A as predetermined display information is displayed on the left light guide plate 1400A-1. (First information) 10040 is displayed so as to be visible to the player, and on the right light guide plate 1400A-2, a small image (first information) 10042 of girl B as display information is displayed so as to be visible to the player. Is issued.

  The light emitted from the light emitting element 10010 (see FIG. 125) of the second light source device 10200 enters the light guide plate from the lower end surface of the light guide plate, and the front side (player) Diffraction to the side). As shown in FIG. 122, a large image 10060 (second information) of the left half of the girl B as predetermined display information is displayed on the left light guide plate 1400A-1 so as to be visible to the player. On the right light guide plate 1400A-2, a large image 10062 (second information) of the right half of the girl B as predetermined display information is displayed so as to be visible to the player. A large image 10063 of the entire girl A is displayed to the player by combining (merging) the second information of the pair of left and right light guide plates.

  The peripheral control board 4140 controls the characteristics (rotation direction and rotation speed) of the pair of left and right motors 10204 and 10206 (see FIG. 119) via a motor drive circuit. Further, the peripheral control board 4140 can determine the positions of the left and right light guide plates based on the rotation amount of a predetermined sensor or stepping motor. The peripheral control board 4140 also controls light emission / extinction, light emission color control, and light emission intensity control of the light emitting elements 10010 of the first light source device 10100 and the second light source device 10200 via the light emission drive circuit. Etc. can be controlled based on the states of the left and right light guide plates (stop of the light guide plate, movement of the light guide plate, position of the light guide plate, etc.).

  The peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not a light guide effect using the light guide plate is necessary by lottery based on the result of the game, for example, a command from the main control board 4100 including a lottery result based on a special symbol. When the “necessary” of the light effect is determined, the effect mode of the light guide plate is determined, selected, set, etc. by lottery from the light guide effect pattern table. Peripheral control board 4140 determines information on the variation time of the special symbol based on the effect command from main control board 4100, and determines the variation time of the decorative symbol based on the variation time of the special symbol. The peripheral control board 4140 executes the light guide effect within the variation time after the decorative symbol variation starts. The light guide effect includes a series of effects from light emission of the light emitting element to light extinction / light guide plate movement start to movement end in the light source device.

For the light guide plate, the left and right light guide plates are either in the first position or the second position, the light emitted by the first light source device, and / or the second light guide plate. There are a plurality of patterns based on the light emission by the light source device.
For example,
(First effect pattern) Both the left and right light guide plates are in the first position, and both turn on the first light source device.
(Second effect pattern) The left light guide plate is moved from the first position to the second position, the right light guide plate is the first position, and the second light source device is turned on at the left light guide plate portion. Illuminating the first light source device of the right light guide plate,
(Third effect pattern) The right light guide plate is moved to the second position, the left light guide plate is in the first position, the second light source device is turned on at the right light guide plate, and the left light guide plate Turn on the first light source of
(Fourth effect pattern) The left and right light guide plates turn on the first light source device for both light guide plates at the first position, and the left and right light guide plates move to the second position and turn on the second light source device. Etc.
There are multiple patterns.

  The degree of expectation for the big hit can be changed according to the difference in the pattern of the light guide effect. For example, the peripheral control board 4140 may select the fourth effect pattern from the light guide effect pattern table as a precursor effect having the highest degree of expectation for the big hit. The peripheral control board 4140 executes the light guide effect as a light emission decoration process (S1400 in FIG. 105).

  Next, the fourth effect pattern will be specifically described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart for controlling the fourth effect pattern. Between t0 and t1, the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 are both in the first position. At the timing t1, the light emitting element 10010 of the first light source device 10100 emits light, and at the timing t2, the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 start moving, and the second light source device 10200 emits light. The element 10010 emits light. In the period from t2 to t1, approximately half of the liquid crystal display area center side of each of the left and right light guide plates is in the viewing area, and light emitted from the first light source device enters the side end surfaces of the left and right light guide plates. As shown in FIG. 119, a small image 10040 of girl A as the first image is displayed on the center half of the liquid crystal display portion of the left light guide plate 1400A-1, and similarly, as the first image A small image 10042 of girl B is displayed on the center half of the liquid crystal display portion of right light guide plate 1400A-2.

  When the left and right light guide plates begin to move from the first position (FIG. 119) to the second position (FIG. 120), the amount of light incident from the first light source device on the side end surface of the light guide plate gradually decreases, so t3 Until the light projection from the first light source device is turned off at the time of, the display intensity of the first images 10040 and 10042 gradually decreases. On the other hand, the left and right light guide plates start to move from the first position to the second position from the time t2, and the light emission from the second light source device is turned on. As the light plate moves, the amount of incident light gradually increases from the lower end surface into the light guide plate, and the display intensity of the second images 10060 and 10062 formed on the light guide plate gradually increases. From the time t2 to the time t3, the display intensity of the second image gradually increases while the display intensity of the first image gradually decreases, and the light projection from the first light source device is turned off at the time t3. The image 1 disappears (FIG. 121). As shown in FIG. 120, during this time, a fused image of the first images 10040, 10042 whose display intensity gradually decreases and the second images 10060, 10062 whose display intensity gradually increases is displayed. The peripheral control board 4140 adjusts the light emission intensity, light emission color, etc. from the first light source device and the light emission intensity, light emission color, etc. from the second light source device, so that the fusion image is clear to the player. It can be made visible. Further, by switching the light emission from the first light source device and the light emission from the second light source device at short intervals, the player can clearly see the fused image. Furthermore, by appropriately adjusting the emission color from the first light source device and the emission color from the second light source device, the emission color of the fused image after the combination of both lights can be changed.

  The display intensity of the second image is gradually increased from the time t3 to the time t4, and the display intensity of the second image is relatively maximum at the time t4 (the left and right light guide plates reach the second position). At the same time, the overall image 16064 of the girl B is completed by the second image 10060 and the second image 10062 (FIG. 122). Since the left and right light guide plates remain in the second position from the time t4 to the time t5, the display of the entire image of the girl B is continued, and the light projection from the second light source device is performed at the time t5. It is turned off and the second image disappears. From time t5, the left and right light guide plates return from the second position to the first position.

  The peripheral control board 4140 moves the left and right light guide plates to change the projection direction from the light source device to the light guide plate, and based on this, the information displayed on the front side of the light guide plate can be changed. The intensity of the information displayed gradually decreases or gradually increases based on the movement of the light guide plate. Before the movement of the light guide plate, a first image based on the first light emission direction is displayed on the light guide plate. When the light guide plate starts to move, the first image and the second light emission direction based on the second light emission direction are displayed. The fused image with the second image is displayed, and the second image is displayed after the light guide plate is moved. As a result, unlike a monotonous light guide plate effect such as whether to display a fixed image that does not change in the fixed light guide plate as before, or not to expose, the light guide effect becomes diverse, The interest in gaming is improved.

  In the light guide effect described above, the light emission from the light source device is controlled in accordance with the movement of the light guide plate. However, the light emission control of the light source device can also be performed without synchronizing with the movement of the light guide plate. For example, when the left and right light guide plates are in the first position, the left and right light guide plates do not actually move to the second position by causing the second light source device to emit light, as can be seen by the player. Even in this case, it is possible to provide an indication effect that expects the right and left light guide plates to move to the second position.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the pair of left and right light guide plates are moved to the left and right with respect to the liquid crystal display region. However, the light guide plates can be moved back and forth with respect to the liquid crystal display region. FIG. 130 is a perspective view showing a state in which the light guide plate 1400A is mounted so as to be movable in the front-rear direction on a guide device 10200 for moving one rectangular light guide plate 1400A back and forth in front of the liquid crystal display area. . The guide device 10104 is formed in an overall L shape so as to be able to hold one side end surface and a lower end surface of the light guide plate 1400A that moves in the front-rear direction. And it is comprised so that it can hold | maintain in each of 3rd position.

  At the first position, a plurality of light emitting elements arranged in a row along the left and right width directions of the light guide plate 1400A as the first light source device on the inner surface 10300 of the horizontal portion 10006 of the guide device with respect to the lower end surface of the light guide plate. The element 10010 is arranged, and in the second position, the second light source device is arranged in a row along the vertical direction of the light guide plate on the inner surface 10302 of the vertical portion 10004 of the guide device with respect to the side end surface of the light guide plate. A plurality of light emitting elements 10010A are arranged. And in the 3rd position, the light source device is not arrange | positioned at the inner surface of the guide apparatus with respect to the end surface of a light-guide plate. FIG. 130 shows a state in which the light guide plate 1400A is supported by the exterior device 10200 at the third position. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 4140 uses the light guide plate by moving the light guide plate 1400A to the first position, the second position, and the third position in the front-rear direction by the front and rear slide mechanism of the light guide plate 1400A. Can be performed. A belt mechanism, a ball screw, or a linear guide, which will be described later, can be applied as the longitudinally moving slide mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 131, at the first position, light is incident in the height direction of the light guide plate from the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1400A, and the girl B10500, which is the first image, appears on the light guide plate. As shown, at the second position, outgoing light is incident in the left-right direction of the light guide plate from the side end surface of the light guide plate, and a girl A10502 as the second image is exposed to the light guide plate. As shown in FIG. 130, in the third position, since the emitted light from any direction is not incident on the light guide plate, no image is displayed on the light guide plate.

  As shown in FIG. 133, in the process in which the light guide plate moves between the first position and the second position, the light incident direction to the light guide plate is changed gradually or continuously. Since the first light source device and the second light source device can simultaneously receive light, a fused image 10504 of the first image and the second image is displayed, and the light guide plate is moved from the first position. In the process of moving to the second position, the first image changes to the second image through the fused image, and in the process of moving the light guide plate from the second position to the first position, the second image It changes to a 1st image through a fusion image. In the case where the light guide plate is between the first position and the second position, the first image and the first image in the fused image depend on whether the amount of incident light from the first light source device or the second light source device is large. The balance of intensity with the second image changes. According to this embodiment, the image displayed on the front side of the light guide plate can be changed by changing the direction of the emitted light with respect to the light guide plate by moving the light guide plate.

  In this embodiment, in order to prevent projections other than light from the first light source device 15100 and the second light source device 10200 to the light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2 as much as possible, the light guide plates 1400A-1, Of the side end surface of 1400A-2, a portion where light projection is not planned from either the first light source device 15100 or the second light source device 15200 (for example, of the left and right light guide plates 1400A-1 and 1400A-2) On the opposite side surface portion, there are provided light incident prevention means (for example, plating vapor deposition for blocking the light incident, pasting a non-translucent seal, etc.) so that light is not incident. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an image from being displayed on the light guide plate at an unintended timing, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Moreover, the display information (image) displayed on the light guide plate is not limited to the picture imitating the character as described above, but may be a message or a pattern such as a character. Furthermore, the drive mode of the light guide plate is not limited to the movement in the left-right direction and the movement in the front-rear direction described above, and may be other movement modes. For example, it is possible to exemplify movement in the vertical direction, rotational movement, etc., and any movement mode is possible as long as the end face (of the light guide plate) on which light is projected before and after the movement can be changed. Also good.

  Next, another embodiment of the effect using the light guide plate will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the light guide plate is movable and the light source device is fixed. However, in the embodiment described below, the light source plate is fixed and the light source device is movable. FIG. 134 shows a gaming board equipped with a rendering device that enables the light source devices 15002 and 15012 to operate around the light guide plate as described later with respect to the fixed light guide plate 1400A on the front surface of the liquid crystal panel 1400-1. FIG. As will be described later, the light source devices 15002 and 15012 are in the decorative body and can be visually recognized by the player without a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 135 is a front view according to the arrangement of the light guide plate 1400A, the liquid crystal panel 1400-1, the light source device 10004, and the like according to this embodiment. The light guide plate 1400A is formed in a rectangular shape that can cover the front surface of the liquid crystal panel 1400-1. The first fixed light source device 10004 is fixedly positioned on the left side of the light guide plate 1400A so that light can be projected onto the left side end surface of the light guide plate 1400A. Are provided in the light guide plate in the width direction. The second fixed light source device 1006 is fixedly positioned below the light guide plate 1400A so that light can be projected onto the lower end surface of the light guide plate. Is provided in the light guide plate in the height direction. The configurations of the first fixed light source device 10004 and the second fixed light source device 10006 may be the same as those of the light source device described above.

  Further, the first movable (possible) light source device 15002 is provided so that the upper end surface of the light guide plate can be moved back and forth in the left-right direction of the light guide plate, and the second movable (possible) light source device 15004 is disposed on the right end surface of the light guide plate. It is provided to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction. The first moving light source device includes a head 15002 having a width smaller than the width of the upper end surface of the light guide plate, and a linear motion mechanism 15000 that guides the movement of the head in the left-right direction. The head 15002 faces close to the upper end surface of the light guide plate, and can be reciprocated along the upper end surface by the linear motion mechanism 15000. On the inner surface of the head 15002, a plurality of light emitting elements 15004 facing the upper end surface of the light guide plate are arranged in a line along the moving direction of the head.

  Similarly, the second moving light source device 15012 includes a head 15012 having a width smaller than the width of the right end surface of the light guide plate, and a linear motion mechanism 15010 for the head. The head 15012 faces close to the right end surface of the light guide plate and can reciprocate along the right end surface by a linear motion mechanism. On the inner surface of the head, a plurality of light emitting elements 15014 are arranged in a row along the moving direction of the head 15012 toward the right end surface of the light guide plate.

  A moving light source device 15002 (15012) and a linear motion mechanism 1500 (15010) for executing movement of the moving light source device are shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, respectively. 136 is a perspective view of the moving light source device 15002 (15012) and the linear motion mechanism 1500 (15010) as seen from the light guide plate side, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the movable light source device and the linear motion mechanism as seen from the outside of the light guide plate. FIG. The linear motion mechanism 15000 (15010) of each of the first moving light source device and the second moving light source device includes a base plate 15100, a pair of pulleys 15102 and 15104 located at both ends in the length direction of the base plate, and a pair of pulleys. A wound belt 15106 and a motor 15108 for driving the pulley 15104 to rotate the belt are provided. A rectangular small plate 15110 of the head 15002 (15012) is fixed to the end face side of the light guide plate of the belt 15106. The linear motion mechanism is fixed to a predetermined area of the game board so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the linear motion mechanism.

  The small plate 15110 holds a first optical element group 15004 (15014) facing the end face of the light guide plate and a second optical element group 15108 facing the front side of the player. The small plate 15110 holds the first optical element group 15004 (15014) and the second optical element group 15108 on different sides, and the traveling direction of the light projected from the first optical element group And the traveling direction of the light projected from the second optical element group do not overlap with each other, the projection light from the first optical element group and the projection light from the second optical element group are mixed. I try to prevent it. The small plate is configured with a non-translucent material or non-transparent decoration (attached with a seal) in order to shield the mixture of both projection lights.

  The linear motion mechanism includes a clamp 15120 for fixing the small plate 15110 to the belt 15106. A decorative body (not shown) is attached to the small plate 15110, and the second optical element group 15108 is turned on, so that the decorative body can be operated as a movable decorative body that can be illuminated. The decorative body is arranged in the player's visible region (see FIG. 134). Note that the first moving light source device 15002 and the second moving light source device 15012 may be arranged so that they cannot be seen by the player.

  As a measure for errors in assembling the moving light source device and the fixed light source device with respect to the light guide plate and alignment of the light guide plate and the light source device due to long-term use of these light source devices, the moving light source device is anticipated in advance to anticipate these errors and positional deviation Or a fixed light source device may be set and installed with respect to the light guide plate. For example, it is conceivable that the moving distance of the moving light source device is made longer than the length of the end face of the light guide plate, or a larger number of light emitting elements are arranged with respect to the small plate 15110.

  FIG. 138 shows a liquid crystal panel 1400-1, a light guide plate 1400A, a first fixed light source device 10004, a second fixed light source device 10006, a first moving light source device 15002, a first linear motion mechanism 15000, and a second movement. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the light source device 15012 and the second linear motion mechanism 15010. Reference numeral 15170 denotes an L-shaped frame, in which the first fixed light source device 10004 is inserted into the groove of the vertical portion 15172, and the second fixed light source device 10006 is inserted into the groove of the horizontal portion 15174. Note that the L-shaped frame may be fixed to the game board so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the frame.

About the effect pattern of the light guide by the first fixed light source device 10004, the second fixed light source device 10006, the first moving light source device 15002, and the second moving light source device 15012, the first fixed light source device Whether or not 10004 is lit on the light guide plate 1400A, whether or not the second fixed light source device 10006 is lit on the light guide plate, whether or not the first moving light source device 15002 is lit on the decorative body, Whether to move (moving direction, moving speed, etc.), whether to light the light guide plate, whether the second moving light source device 10006 lights the decorative body, moving (moving direction, moving speed, etc.) ) And there are various production patterns depending on the combination of whether or not the light guide plate is lit.
For example, there are the following patterns.
# 1: The first fixed light source device is turned on. # 2: The second fixed light source device is turned on. # 3: The first moving light source device is moved (decorative body lighting).
# 4: The first moving light source device moves (light guide plate lights up)
# 5: The first moving light source device moves (decorative body lighting / light guide plate lighting)
# 6: Second moving light source device moves (decorative body lighting)
# 7: The second moving light source device moves (light guide plate lights up)
# 8: Second moving light source device moves (decorative body lighting / light guide plate lighting)
# 9: First and second moving light source devices move (decorative lighting)
# 10: First and second moving light source devices move (light guide plate lights up)
# 11: First and second moving light source devices move (decorative body lighting / light guide plate lighting)
Due to the difference in production pattern, the above-mentioned # 1 production pattern has the lowest expectation for advantageous games such as jackpot games, etc., in the order of # 2 production pattern, # 3 production pattern, # 4 production pattern,. Each performance pattern is set in the pattern selection table so that the expectation level is high and the # 11 performance pattern has the highest level of expectation, and one performance pattern is determined based on the winning lottery result of the advantageous game. Controlled to be selected and determined.

  Further, the emission of light to the light guide plate may be executed by a combination of a fixed light source device and a moving light source device. For example, the light emission direction to the light guide unit may be switched as follows. Output of light from the first fixed light source device to the light guide plate → Output of light to the light guide plate during movement of the first moving light source device → Output of light from the second fixed light source device to the light guide plate → second The light projection direction and the projection range to the light guide means in a cycle of output of light to the light guide plate during the movement of the moving light source device → output of light to the light guide plate from the first fixed light source device For example, switching control can be performed. By doing so, the light guide plate is not monotonous or fixed, but has a variety of forms, and it is possible to achieve a gaming effect that attracts the player's attention and does not get bored by the player. . Further, there may be a pattern in which the first moving light source device and the second moving light source device are turned on with respect to the light guide plate without being moved.

  Further, the drive control circuit of the motor 15108 of the first moving light source device and the second moving light source device can supply a pulse signal to the motor to control the rotation speed and rotation direction of the motor. The peripheral control board 4140 can determine the position of the head 15002 (15012) with respect to the end face of the light guide plate based on the pulse signal supplied to the motor from the drive control circuit. The peripheral control board 4140 is based on a command from the main control board 4100, the first fixed light source device 10004, the second fixed light source device 10006, the first moving light source device 15002, and the second moving light source device 15012. Are used to determine, select, set, and the like, and output a drive control signal to the drive control circuit of the optical element and the drive control circuit of the motor.

  Next, a first example of an effect when the light guide plate is fixed and the light source device is movable will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 139, the light guide plate 1400 </ b> A includes a first design 15080 (a plurality of designs imitating a star) that is displayed according to the irradiation light from the first fixed light source device 10004, and a design shown in FIG. 140. In addition, a second pattern 15082 (a plurality of constellation symbols) is displayed in accordance with the irradiation light from the second fixed light source device 10006. When light is irradiated over the entire length of the end face of the light guide plate by the first fixed light source device 10004, the entire first symbol 15080 is exposed to the light guide plate. Further, when light is irradiated over the entire length of the end face of the light guide plate by the second fixed light source device 10006, the entire second second pattern 15082 is exposed to the light guide plate.

  When the first moving light source device 15002 moves while lighting the light guide plate 1400A, as shown in FIG. 141, the target portion 15086 of the second symbol on the movement locus of the first moving light source device is moved. Expressed in conjunction, synchronization, and related. When the second moving light source device 15012 moves while lighting on the light guide plate 1400A, as shown in FIG. 142, the target portion 15088 of the first symbol in the range of the movement trajectory is exposed as it moves. It is. In this effect mode, the first fixed light source device 10002, the second fixed light source device 10004, the first moving light source device 15002, and the second moving light source device 15012 are simultaneously lit toward the light guide plate. There is no such thing, and each is individually controlled to be lit.

  In this way, the first symbol 15080 is displayed all at once, the first symbol is partially displayed in conjunction with the movement of the moving light source device 15012, or the second symbol 15082 is expressed all at once. Or the second design can be partially displayed in conjunction with the movement of the moving light source device 15002, and the effects using the light guide plate can be diversified to increase the player's willingness to play. The game effect that you can do is obtained. Furthermore, by providing a plurality of patterns of movement speeds of the first moving light source device 15002 and the second moving light source device 1501, various aspects of the change of the target portion of the symbol within the range of movement of the moving light source device can be obtained. It is possible to make it even more fun.

  The plurality of optical elements in which the first fixed light source device 10004 is arranged in a row are turned on in order, so that the target portion 15088 of the first symbol 15080 is displayed in order, and the second fixed light source device 10006 is It is possible to express the target portion 15086 of the second symbol 15082 in order by turning on the plurality of optical elements arranged in a row in order. However, the change in the target portion by this configuration is intermittent based on the on / off state of the optical element, whereas when the light source device is moved, the change in the target portion is as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. A continuous and smooth form with fade-in and fade-out is achieved.

  Next, a second example of the effect when the light guide plate is fixed and the light source device is movable will be specifically described. In the first example described above, the first moving light source device 15002 and the second moving light source device 15012 are not lit on the light guide plate side at the same time. In the second example, an aspect of the effect in which the first moving light source device and the second moving light source device are simultaneously turned on will be described.

  In the second example, as shown in FIG. 145, the target portion image 15086 expressed by the projection light from the first moving light source device 15002 and the projection light from the second moving light source device 15012 are displayed. The target portion image 15088 is displayed on the light guide plate 1400A. The target part image 15086 is developed in the Y-axis direction, and the target part image 15088 is developed in the X-axis direction. A fusion image 15089 is displayed in the intersecting region of the images of these target portions. As described above, various and various images appear from the light guide plate, so that the effect of the light guide plate is varied. It is also possible to change the winning expectation for the big hit game depending on which fused image is displayed.

  Further, when the first moving light source device 15002 and the second moving light source device 15012 are moving, as shown in FIG. 146, the target portion image 15086 and the target portion image 15088 match the movement of the moving light source. Therefore, the player has a sense of expectation and tension as to which part of the image 15086 of the target portion and the image 15088 of the target portion intersect and what kind of fused image is displayed. Is possible. In particular, for example, this is remarkable in a moving form in which the moving light source device reciprocates in a narrow range, the moving speed of the moving light source device changes, or the like.

  Next, based on FIG. 147, a third example of the light guide effect by the light guide plate 1400A using the first moving light source device (decorative body) 15002 and the second moving light source device (decorating body) 15012 will be described. The flow of production will be specifically described. For convenience of explanation, the image displayed on the light guide plate is different from that described above. That is, “■■■” is displayed on the light guide plate instead of the first symbol of the star shape, and “◯ × ○” is displayed on the light guide plate instead of the second symbol of the constellation symbol.

  (1) The first moving light source device 15002 and the second moving light source device 15012 have both the first light emitting element group (light guide plate side) 15600 and the second light emitting element group (player side) 15602. It is a front view of the state which is not lighting. When at least one of the first moving light source device 15002 and the second light source device 15012 operates, prior to that, the liquid crystal display unit behind the light guide plate 1400A, for example, “ There may be provided means for expecting the effect of the light guide plate, such as displaying a message such as “Look at the name)” or an image reminiscent of this. The player can visually recognize this message through the light guide plate.

  In (2), regarding the first moving light source device 15002 and the second moving light source device 15012, the second light emitting element group (player side) 15602 is turned on together and the decoration body is lit up and the movement is started. State. When the second light emitting element group (player side) 15602 is lit together, the player can expect, feel, etc., the movement of the first moving light source device and the second moving light source device. Even in this state, information for causing the rear liquid crystal display unit to further expect the effect of the light guide plate may be continuously output.

  In (3), for the first moving light source device 15002 and the second moving light source device 15012, both the second light emitting element group (player side) 15602 are turned off and the first light emitting element group 15600 is moved while moving. Lights up. Depending on the position of the first moving light source device 15002, the relevant part (○ × ○) 16010 of the second symbol in the range of the locus and the range of the locus depending on the position of the second moving light source device 15012 The related part (■■■) 16012 of the first symbol is displayed. A fusion image 16014 of the related portion of the first symbol and the related portion of the second symbol is displayed at the intersection of the locus region of the first moving light source device and the locus region of the second moving light source device. The degree of expectation for advantageous games can be changed according to the form of the fused image. In this state, on the rear liquid crystal display unit, for example, predetermined information 16000 that recalls the expectation for an advantageous game such as a big hit is displayed in the vicinity of the related portion (◯ × ◯) of the first and second symbols.

  (4) indicates that the fused image 16014 is (× and ■), and (5) indicates that the fused image 16014 is (◯ and ■). In the aspect (5), the degree of expectation for jackpot may be higher than that in the aspect (4). In (5), the second light emitting element group 15062 may be further turned on for differentiation from (4). In (4) and (5), a message 16000 such as “Win!” Or “Sorry” is displayed on the rear liquid crystal display unit, for example, in the vicinity of the related part 16010 (◯◯◯) of the first symbol. You may do it. In order to make it easier for the player to confirm the image displayed on the light guide plate 1400A, the background color is darkened in the liquid crystal display area behind the display pattern area on the light guide plate so that the player can display the light guide plate. What is necessary is to make it easy to confirm the image.

  According to the production form described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 147, the appearance of the light guide plate can be varied according to the movement form of one or a plurality of moving light source devices. As described above, what is merely monotonous and fixed in the appearance of the image displayed on the light guide plate becomes rich and interesting for the player.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 145 to FIG. 147, since the displayed image (fused image) on the light guide plate changes according to the movement form of the plurality of moving light source devices, for a player who pays attention to the fused image Further, the effects of the light guide plate are further diversified, so that the game entertainment can be further improved.

  As described above, according to the embodiment of the light guide plate effect described above, movement of the light source device can change characteristics such as the direction and range of light projected onto the light guide plate by moving the light source device. It is possible to induce a change in the information to be output, to relate the movement of the light source device to the information change from the light guide plate, and to give the player various light guide plate effects.

  Although the movement mode of the light source device has been described as being horizontal with respect to the light guide plate, it may be movable in the thickness direction of the light guide plate. Moreover, you may make it the structure which can move a light guide plate and a light source device together, and the positional relationship of a light guide plate and a light source device should just change relatively. Further, the light source device and the light guide plate may be configured such that the movement form is rotatable.

  Note that although one moving light source device is provided for the end face of the light guide plate, two or more moving light source devices may be used. The linear motion mechanism may be a linear guide or a ball screw.

  Next, the jackpot type of the aforementioned gaming machine will be described in detail. When winning the jackpot lottery, the style of the jackpot may differ depending on the symbols displayed as the first special symbol (special symbol 1 in FIG. 148) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 in FIG. 148). Further, the distribution of the aspect is also different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the time-stricken symbol 1 is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, “specific area non-passing_dealing 10R short-time 20 times” is determined. When the time-stricken symbol 2 is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, “specific area passing_departing presence 12R1 time-shortening 100 times” is determined. When the time-stricken symbol 3 is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, “specific area passing_departing ball 12R2 time-shortening 100 times” is determined.

  Further, when the time-stricken symbol 4 is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, “specific area passing_departing 12R3 time-shortening 100 times” is determined. As the second special symbol, when the time-stricken symbol 5 is stopped and displayed, “specific area passing_departing ball 12R4 time-shortening 100 times” is determined. As the second special symbol, when the time-stricken symbol 6 is stopped and displayed, “pass through the specific area_existing ball 12R5 time-shorter 100 times” is determined.

  For example, in the first special symbol, the probability that the hourly symbol 1 is stopped and displayed is 110/200, the probability that the hourly symbol 2 is stopped and displayed is 86/200, and the probability that the hourly symbol 3 is stopped and displayed is 4 / 200. On the other hand, the probability that the short-time symbol 4 in the second special symbol will be stopped is 180/200, the probability that the short-time symbol 4 will be stopped is 18/200, and the short-time symbol 4 in the second special symbol will be stopped. The probability is 2/200.

  “Specified area non-passing_Dead ball 10R short time 20 times”, after the big hit gaming state, the transition to the normal gaming state without shifting to the so-called probability variation gaming state, and the number of times of the short time gaming state ends with 20 times It can be a big hit that is not very favorable for the player. On the other hand, “passing a specific area_12R1 (up to 5) hourly 100 times” is a big hit in which, after the big hit gaming state, the state shifts to a so-called probability variation gaming state and the number of times of the short time gaming state continues 100 times. It can be a big hit for players. Here, in the lottery by the first special symbol being stopped and displayed, the ratio of “specific area non-passing out ball existence 10R short time 20 times” that may become unfavorable for the player is “specific area passing out_out of ball existence 12R1 (2 )) 100 times faster ”than the mixing ratio. On the other hand, in the lottery based on the second special symbol being stopped and displayed, the “specific area passing_departing ball 12R3 (˜5) time reduction 100 times”, which may be preferable for the player, is always achieved.

  In the gaming machine 1A, in the short-time gaming state, compared to not in the short-time gaming state (during the non-short-time gaming state), the normal symbol winning (normal lottery) performed when passing through the normal gate 2005a is compared. Control that increases the probability of winning and shortens the variation time of the normal symbol is executed. For this reason, during the short-time gaming state, a lot of big hit lotteries are executed in a short time. In addition, during the short-time game, the normal symbols are frequently hit and the movable pieces 2008a and 2008b of the second starting port 2008 are frequently opened. Therefore, the number of changes in the second special symbol is greater than the number of changes in the first special symbol. May also increase.

  Next, a description will be given of how the big winning opening is opened when the game state shifts to the big hit gaming state. In the gaming machine 1A, there are the lower major prize opening 2003 and the right major prize winning opening 7000 as the big prize winning openings, and which big winning prize opening will be described in which jackpot. When any of the short-time symbols 1 to 6 is displayed upon opening of the big prize opening, the number of open rounds of the big prize opening is, for example, 12 rounds. Hereinafter, the opening of the n-th round will be described as Rn.

  As shown in FIG. 149, first, the start interval is set until the first opening of the special winning opening is performed. The time of the start interval is “Pattern a” when the time-short symbol 1, 4, 5 is displayed, “Pattern b” when the time-short symbol 3 is displayed, and the time-short symbol 5, 6 are displayed. When it is done, it becomes “pattern c”.

  Of these, as shown in FIG. 150 (a), “Pattern a” is a low probability state (normal state) and 12336 (msec) when the time is not activated, and a high probability state (probability change state). It is set to 4000 (msec) for short-time operation, and 4000 (msec) for low-speed operation with low probability. “Pattern b” is 9100 (msec) when the low probability state is short-time non-operating, 4000 (msec) when the high-probability state is short-time operation, and 4000 (msec) when the short-time operation is low probability. m seconds). Further, the “pattern c” is 9100 (msec) when the low probability state is in short-time operation, 8 (msec) when in the high-probability state and short-time operation, 8 ( m seconds).

  When the start interval time elapses, the special winning opening of R1 (first round) is opened. The opening pattern of the special winning opening will be described first in the case where the time shortened symbol 1 is displayed. In the opening of R1 (first round) when the time-saving symbol 1 is displayed, the lower entrance entrance 2003 is opened with “pattern A”. As shown in FIG. 150 (b), the “pattern A” is opened for 29 seconds and then for 2 seconds. The total opening time at this time is 29 seconds. The opening of “Pattern A” is, so to speak, the opening of the 2003 Shimodai prize opening.

  Thereafter, from R2 (second round) to R10 (tenth round), the lower prize winning opening 2003 is opened with “pattern A”. Then, in R11 (the eleventh round), the right big prize opening 7000 is opened with “pattern D”. In the opening of “pattern D”, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the opening is performed for 0.08 seconds and then the closing is performed for 1.9 seconds. The total opening time at this time is 0.08 seconds. The opening of “Pattern D” is, so to speak, a shortened opening to the right big prize opening. The opening of the right big prize opening 7000 is performed only by R11 among R1 to R12.

  In the subsequent R12 (12th round), Shimodai Iriguchi 2003 is opened with “Pattern B”. In the opening of “pattern B”, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the opening is performed for 0.08 seconds and then the closing is performed for 6 seconds. The total opening time at this time is 0.08 seconds. The opening of “Pattern B” is, so to speak, the opening of the lower prize winning opening. The opening of the special winning opening when the time-saving symbol 1 is displayed is continued in this way.

  In addition, when the time-saving symbol 2 is displayed, first, the lower entrance entrance 2003 is opened with “pattern A” as R1 (first round) is opened. Subsequently, from R2 (second round) to R10 (tenth round), the lower prize winning opening 2003 is opened with “pattern A”. Up to this point, the special winning opening is opened in the same pattern as when the time-saving symbol 1 is displayed.

  In the subsequent R11 (11th round), the right big prize opening 7000 is opened with “pattern C”. In the opening of “Pattern C”, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the right big prize opening 7000 opens twice. The first time is 0.08 seconds of opening, followed by 2 seconds of closing. Subsequently, for the second time, 25 seconds of opening is performed, followed by 2 seconds of closing. As described above, the opening times of the right big prize opening 7000 in R11 (the eleventh round) are 25.1 seconds (25.08 seconds) in total. The opening of “Pattern C” is, so to speak, the opening of the right grand prize winning opening. And in R12 (the 12th round), Shimodai Iriguchi 2003 is opened with “Pattern A”. The opening of the special winning opening when the time-short symbol 2 is displayed continues in this way.

  In addition, when the short-time symbols 3 to 6 are displayed, the big winning opening is opened in the same pattern as when the short-time symbol 2 is displayed.

  Thus, when the short-time symbol 1 is displayed, R1 (the first round) to R10 (the tenth round) are released with “pattern A” which is a long opening, but R11 (the eleventh round) ), R12 (12th round) is a shortened release of “pattern D” and “pattern B”. In the shortened opening, the opening time of the lower grand prize opening 2003,7000 is only 0.08 seconds, and it is rare that a game ball enters the big prize opening. For this reason, when the short-time symbol 1 is displayed, in the sense that a winning ball can be obtained, the big winning opening of 10 rounds is substantially opened.

  On the other hand, when the short-time symbols 2 to 6 are displayed, “pattern A” and “pattern C” that are long open are performed from R1 (first round) to R12 (tenth round). For this reason, since the 12 round round winning prize opening will be performed, there is a higher possibility that more game balls will be paid out than when the short-time symbol 1 is displayed.

  The roles of these short-time symbols 1 to 6 are outlined in FIGS. 149 and 150 (c). The short-time symbol 1 is a short-time symbol when displaying a basic effect as a big hit start production, and is a symbol that is displayed when shifting to the normal game state instead of the probable game state after the big hit game state is finished. .

  Also, the short-time symbols 2 and 4 are short-time symbols when displaying a basic effect as a big hit start effect, and are symbols that are displayed when shifting to a probable game state after the big hit game state is completed. Furthermore, the short-time symbols 3 and 5 are short-time symbols when displaying the premier effect as a big hit start effect, and are displayed when the game state is shifted to the probability variation game state after the big hit game state is ended. Further, the time shortened symbol 6 is replacement dummy data having the same configuration as the time shortened symbol 5.

  When the gaming machine 1A determines that the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is a jackpot symbol, the gaming machine 1A determines whether the jackpot symbol displayed in a stopped state is any of the short-time symbols 1 to 6, and the jackpot displayed in a stopped state. The symbols are referred to the winning prize opening manner determination table shown in FIG. 149, and information corresponding to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (a winning mouth opening manner including a start interval) is set. FIG. 151 is a flowchart for explaining the feature of this process. When starting the big hit game, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU) determines whether or not the round end flag is ON (S2101). The round end flag is turned ON when a predetermined number, for example, nine game balls are won in the big winning opening, or when a predetermined opening time shown in FIG. 149 (b) has elapsed. If it is determined that the round end flag is not ON, the process of step S2101 is repeated until the round end flag is ON.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end flag is ON, it is determined whether there is a next round opening (S2102). This determination is made based on whether or not the current round is the final round. If it is not the final round, it is determined that there is a next round.

  If it is determined that there is a next round, it is determined whether or not the right big prize opening 7000 is opened in the next round (S2103). As shown in FIG. 149, when the next round is the eleventh round, it is determined that the right big prize opening 7000 is opened, and in the other rounds, the lower big prize opening 2003 is opened. It is determined that the mouth 7000 is not opened.

  As a result, if it is determined that the right big prize opening 7000 is to be opened, the probability variation area valid flag is turned ON (S2104). When the probability variation area valid flag is turned on, when the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects a game ball, the probability variation flag for turning the gaming state after the big hit into the probability variation state for the specified number of variations is turned on. In addition, when the probability variation area valid flag is not ON, even if the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects a game ball, the probability variation flag does not become ON.

  If the probability variation area valid flag is set to ON, the right big prize opening 7000 is opened (S2105). Then, the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects a game ball and determines whether or not the detection is the first detection (S2106). If the probability variation area sensor 6992 does not detect a game ball or if the number of times detected is the second or later, the process proceeds to step S2110.

  If the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects a game ball and determines that the detection is the first detection, the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2107).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the round end flag is ON (S2110). Here, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the right big prize opening 7000 or when the opening time of the right big prize opening 7000 reaches a specified time, the round end flag is turned ON and the round end flag is set. Is determined to be ON. In other cases, it is determined that the round end flag is not ON, and the process returns to step S2106 to repeat the same processing.

  If it is determined that the round end flag is ON, the probability variation area valid flag is turned OFF after a predetermined time has elapsed (S2111). Then, the process returns to step S2102 and the same processing is repeated. If it is determined in step S2103 that the right big prize opening 7000 is not opened, the lower big prize opening 2003 is opened (S2112). Then, it is determined whether or not the round end flag is ON (S2113). Here, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the lower grand prize opening 2003 or when the opening time of the right big prize opening 7000 reaches a specified time, the round end flag is turned ON and the round end flag is set. Is determined to be ON, the process returns to step S2102 and the same processing is repeated. In other cases, it is determined that the round end flag is not ON, and the process of step S2113 is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S2102 that the next round is not released, ending data is set (S2114). As the ending data, the time for displaying the ending effect is set. The time for displaying the ending effect is set to a predetermined time. Further, an ending data command corresponding to the ending data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed (S2115). If the ending time has not elapsed, the process of step S2115 is repeated until the ending time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2116). If it is determined that the probability change flag is ON, the game state is set to the probability change game state (S2117). Then, the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2118), and the variation pattern table is reset (S2119). Subsequently, the time reduction state is set (S2120), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2116 that the probability variation flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2119, the variation pattern table is reset (S2119), the time reduction state is set (S2120), and the process ends. To do. When setting the short-time state, if the displayed symbol is the short-time symbol 1, set the short-time number to 20 times, and in the short-time symbol 2 to 6, the short-time number is set to 150 times, for example. set.

In setting the time reduction state, here, the following setting is made as the registration number of the game state transition destination after the end of the big hit gaming state.
Registration number 0: not passing the probability variation area 6970 (100 times shorter)
Registration number 1: State that has passed through the probability variation area 6970 (150 times shorter)

  Then, the registration number 0 is set and set when the game state shifts to the big hit gaming state, and when the game ball passes the probability variation area 6970, the registration number is incremented (+1) and the registration number 1 is set. By making such a setting, for example, when the program is used in another pachinko machine, even if the number of time reductions changes, the change can be easily handled.

  In addition, when the game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 7000 is guided to the probability changing area 6970 during the big hit gaming state, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended becomes the probability changing gaming state. On the other hand, when all the game balls that have entered the right big prize opening 7000 are guided to the normal area 6960 without being guided to the probability variation area 6970, the game state after the big hit gaming state is ended becomes the normal game state. . However, in either case, the game shifts to the short-time gaming state.

  Furthermore, the operation mode of the sorting member 6923 in the taxiway sorting unit 6920 changes depending on the type of the special symbol displayed, and the game balls that have entered the right big prize opening 7000 are displayed in the normal area 6960 and the probability changing area 6970. It controls which is distributed. During the big hit game state, the right big prize opening 7000 is opened only in the eleventh round. During the eleventh round, the right big prize opening 7000 entered by the right attacker unit 6900 and the taxiway allocation unit 6920 is entered. A game ball is guided. The ball entering the right big prize opening 7000 and the guidance to the normal area 6960 or the probability changing area 6970 are performed by opening / closing control of the right big prize opening opening / closing member 6933 and tilt control of the guide path distribution member 6923.

  Specifically, when the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 is opened, a game ball can enter the right big prize opening 7000. The game ball that has entered the right grand prize winning port 7000 is guided to the distribution guide path 6980 on the back side of the guide path distribution unit 6920 through the game ball introduction port 6950. Here, when the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the game balls introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 are distributed to the normal area 6960. When the guide path distribution member 6923 is swung to the left from the state shown in FIG. 67 (b) to close the normal area 6960, a game ball introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 is used. Are distributed to the probability variation area 6970. Among these, the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 is opened and closed by the right big prize opening solenoid 6932, and the guide path distribution member 6923 is tilted by the guide path distribution solenoid 6922.

  Below, the opening and closing operation of the right big prize opening and the lower big prize opening during each round in the big hit gaming state and the ON / OFF state of the lower big prize winning solenoid, the right big prize winning solenoid 6932, and the guide path distribution solenoid 6922 Will be described. 152 is a time chart in the vicinity of the eleventh round when any of the short-time symbols 2 to 6 is displayed, and FIG. 153 is a time chart in the vicinity of the eleventh round when the time-short symbol 1 is displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 152, when any of the short-time symbols 2 to 6 is displayed, when the eleventh round starts, the special symbol is stopped and the condition device and the accessory continuous action device are activated. Yes. The special electric accessory 1 is in the tenth round before the special electric accessory 1 that is activated when the eleventh round is started, and the eleventh round is started from the time when the special electric accessory 1 is activated. Start. In addition, after the operation of the special electric accessory 1 is finished and stopped, the time until the special electric accessory 2 is operated next is in the twelfth round. The special electric combination 1 is a special electric combination corresponding to the right big prize opening 7000, and the special electric combination 2 is a special electric combination corresponding to the lower big prize opening 2003. Further, the probability variation area valid flag is turned ON when the operation of the special electric accessory 1 is started, and the probability variation area validity flag is turned OFF when the operation of the special electric accessory 1 is finished. However, even when the special electric accessory 1 is in operation, it is possible to set the time for which the probability variation area valid flag is OFF. For example, the probability variation region is within a few seconds, for example, 2 seconds, while the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 is ON, or while the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 is ON, and after the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 is OFF. The flag can also be turned on.

  During the operation of the special electric accessory 1, the right big prize opening 7000 is opened twice. In the first opening operation, the special electric accessory 1 is opened at the same time as the operation starts, and is opened for 0.08 seconds (Y2). Thereafter, the closed state continues for 2 seconds, and the second opening operation is performed at the time (Z) when 2 seconds have passed. The second opening operation continues for 25 seconds (Y3). After 25 seconds have passed since the right big prize opening 7000 is opened, the right big prize opening 7000 is closed. After that, the second round ends and the eleventh round ends. When a predetermined number of, for example, nine game balls enter the right grand prize opening 7000 when the right big prize opening 7000 is opened for the first time and the second time, the game is played without waiting for the elapse of the opening time. When the ball is detected, the right big prize opening 7000 is closed. The eleventh round is completed after waiting for two seconds. However, since the first opening time of the right prize winning opening 7000 is as short as 0.08 seconds, it is very rare for a game ball to enter the right prize winning opening 7000 here.

  The opening of the right big prize opening 7000 is opened by turning on the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 and closed by turning it off. For this reason, the timing at which the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 is turned on and off is synchronized with the timing at which the right big prize opening 7000 is opened.

  Further, the guidance path distribution solenoid (distribution device solenoid) 6922 is turned on at the same time that the eleventh round starts, in other words, the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 is turned on and the right big prize opening 7000 is opened. It becomes. When the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 is turned on, the guideway distribution member 6923 in the standing state is in an inclined state, and the game ball that has entered the right big prize winning port 7000 can be guided to the probability changing area 6970.

  Here, the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 turned ON is turned OFF when 0.06 seconds (Y4) have elapsed, and the guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state. For this reason, the guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state in the middle of the first opening of the right big prize winning opening 7000. Also, considering the time lag until the game ball that has entered the right grand prize winning opening 7000 reaches the position of the taxiway sorting member 6923, the game ball will temporarily win the right big winning prize at the first opening of the right big winning prize opening 7000. Even if the ball enters the mouth 7000, the game ball is hardly guided to the probability variation area 6970 by the guide path distribution member 6923 in the inclined state.

  Furthermore, after 0.02 seconds have passed and the right grand prize winning opening 7000 is closed, when the second opening of the right grand winning prize opening 7000 is performed, the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 is simultaneously turned ON, A game ball that has entered the winning opening 7000 can be guided to the probability variation area 6970. Then, when 25.9 seconds (Y5) have passed, in other words, 0.9 seconds (the hatched portion of Y5) has passed since the closing of the right prize winning opening 7000, the taxiway distribution solenoid is turned off, The guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state.

  Here, if the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 operates in synchronization with the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 and the right big prize opening 7000 is closed, and at the same time the guidance path distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state, When the game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 7000 reaches the position of the guideway distribution member 6923 just before the winning opening 7000 is closed, the guideway distribution member 6923 has already returned to the standing state, and the probability change In some cases, guidance to the area 6970 cannot be achieved. In this regard, the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 is turned off after 0.9 seconds have elapsed since the right big prize winning opening 7000 was closed. Considering the time required to reach the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 from the big prize opening 7000, 0.9 seconds is considered to be sufficient. For this reason, even a game ball entered at the last moment when the special winning opening 7000 is closed can reach the guideway distribution member 6923 before the guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state. In this case, the probability variation region 6970 is guided. It should be noted that in order to guide the game ball that entered the right big prize opening 7000 to the probability variation area 6970 just before the right big prize opening 7000 is closed, the guide path distribution solenoid 6922 is turned off after the right big prize opening 7000 is closed. However, the time until the game ball can be guided to the probability variation area 6970 can be set to be around 0.9 seconds.

  The special electric accessory 2 does not operate during the eleventh round. In addition, during the eleventh round, the lower grand prize opening 2003 is kept open without being opened. Further, the lower large prize opening solenoid is maintained in the OFF state and does not enter the ON state.

  Next, the case where the time-saving symbol 1 is displayed will be described. As shown in FIG. 153, when the short time symbol 1 is displayed, when the eleventh round is started, the special symbol is stopped and the condition is the same as when any of the short time symbols 2 to 6 is displayed. The device and the accessory continuous actuator are operating. The special electric accessory 1 operates when the eleventh round is started. The 10th round is before the special electric accessory 1 is activated, and the eleventh round starts when the special electric accessory 1 is activated. In addition, after the operation of the special electric accessory 1 is finished and stopped, the time until the special electric accessory 2 is operated next is in the twelfth round.

  Unlike the case where any of the short-time symbols 2 to 6 is displayed, the right big prize opening 7000 performs one opening operation during the operation of the special electric accessory 1. The opening operation of the right big prize opening 7000 is opened simultaneously with the start of the operation of the special electric accessory 1 and is opened for 0.08 seconds (Y5). Thereafter, the closed state continues for 1.9 seconds. The eleventh round is completed when 1.9 seconds have elapsed since the closing of the right prize winning opening 7000. When a predetermined number of, for example, nine game balls enter due to the opening of the right big prize opening 7000, the right big prize opening 7000 is detected when the entry of the game ball is detected without waiting for the elapse of the opening time. Close. However, since the opening time of the right grand prize opening 7000 is as short as 0.08 seconds, a game ball hardly enters the right big prize opening 7000 here. The timing for turning on and off the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 is synchronized with the timing when the right big prize opening 7000 is opened.

  Further, the guidance path distribution solenoid (distribution device solenoid) 6922 is turned on at the same time as the eleventh round starts, the right big prize opening solenoid 6932 is turned on and the right big prize opening 7000 is opened, and the guidance path vibration is turned on. The minute member 6923 is in an inclined state, and the game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 7000 can be guided to the probability variation area 6970. Then, when 0.06 seconds elapses, the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 is turned OFF, and the guideway distribution member 6923 is returned to the standing state. In this case as well, the game ball is hardly guided to the probability variation area 6970 by the guiding path distribution member 6923 in the inclined state, as in the case where the short time symbols 2 to 6 are displayed. Therefore, when the time shortened symbol 1 is displayed, the guideway distribution member 6923 may be inclined so that it can be guided to the probability variation area 6970, but the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the inclined state. Since the game ball hardly enters the right grand prize opening 7000 at the time of being, the game ball is substantially guided to the probability variation area 6970 when the short time symbol 1 is displayed. It will never happen.

  In this way, when the short-time symbols 2 to 6 are displayed, the game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 7000 in the eleventh round is almost certainly guided to the probability variation area 6970. On the other hand, when the short-time symbol 1 is displayed, in all rounds including the eleventh round, there is almost no game ball entering the right big prize opening 7000. Even if a game ball enters the mouth 7000, the game ball is hardly guided to the probability variation area 6970. Therefore, it is substantially determined whether to shift to the probabilistic gaming state or the normal gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended depending on which of the short-time symbols 1 to 6 is displayed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to avoid the lottery of whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state and the detection by various sensors therefor. However, such a lottery or the like may be performed.

  In addition, regarding this transition to a probable gaming state, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts may be performed when this type of lottery is performed, and in order to prevent loss due to this fraudulent act, various sensors detect and match the lottery results. However, fraud can be suppressed without performing this type of confirmation. If a game ball is in the probability variation area 6970 when the short-time symbol 1 is displayed, there is a strong possibility that an illegal act has been performed, but the game ball is guided to the probability variation area 6970. Since it is not prohibited, it cannot be determined to be fraudulent. Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball is guided to the probability variation area 6970 when the short-time symbol 1 is displayed, an illegal act is generated by outputting a signal different from the signal when the illegal act is detected. Can inform you of the possibility. However, the signal at this time may have a smaller degree of notification than when an illegal act occurs.

  In the gaming machine according to this aspect having the above configuration, the probability variation area 6970 is arranged on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910 and further on the back side of the space 6602 in the attacker unit accommodation area 6600. For this reason, when it sees from the glass plate 564 (refer FIG. 12), it arrange | positions behind a predetermined area | region and the predetermined distance is hold | maintained between the glass plate 564 and the probability variation area | region 6970. FIG.

  Therefore, even if a fraudulent act is planned to the probability variation area sensor 6992 that detects the passing of the game ball with respect to the probability variation area 6970 using a magnet from the surface side of the gaming machine, the magnetic force of the magnet does not reach or is difficult to reach. Action can be suppressed. In addition, even if a fraudulent act is planned using a piano wire or the like, since the distance from the surface side of the gaming machine to the probability variation area 6970 is long, the manipulation of the piano wire or the like becomes complicated, thereby suppressing the fraudulent act. Can do.

  Note that the guide path distribution member 6923 that distributes the game balls that have entered the right winning prize opening 7000 to the normal area 6960 or the probability variation area 6970 is visible to the player through the glass plate 564. The sorting member 6923 is visually recognized through the surface plate 6601. Therefore, while it is possible to visually recognize that the game balls are distributed to the probability variation region 6970 through the glass plate 564, the probability variation region sensor 6992 that detects the passage of the game ball with respect to the probability variation region 6970 is made difficult or invisible. Yes. Further, the guideway distribution member 6923 and the probability variation area 6970 are disposed at the lower right corner of the gaming machine, and are disposed at positions where it is difficult for the player's eyes to reach. The probability variation area 6970 and the like are arranged at such a position, which contributes to suppression of fraud.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress an illegal act that misrecognizes the passage of a game ball to the probability change area 6970, it is possible to suppress a transition to an incorrect probability change game state. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a large amount of damage in the game hall due to the transition to the probability variation gaming state.

  Further, in order to suppress fraud, fraud detection sensors may be provided in the vicinity of the probability variation area 6970, for example, in the right attacker unit 6900, the distribution guide path 6980, and the guide path distribution member 6923. By providing such a fraud detection sensor, it is possible to further contribute to suppression of fraud. As the fraud detection sensor, for example, when a magnet is assumed to be used illegally, a sensor corresponding to the assumed fraud mode can be appropriately determined, such as using a magnet sensor.

  Furthermore, it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball that has passed through the right prize winning opening 7000 once, and the game ball is visually recognized until the game ball moves from the prize winning opening 7000 to the probability changing area 6980. It is also possible to provide an obstruction means for preventing the above. By providing such an obstruction means, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the timing at which the game ball reaches the probability variation area 6970. As a result, it is possible to further contribute to fraud suppression.

  In addition, when the guide path distribution member 6923 is in the standing state, the guide path distribution member 6923 stands in a region outside the region from the distribution guide path 6980 to the normal region 6960 and is in the standing state. Is arranged at a position where a game ball passing through the distribution guiding path 6980 and reaching the normal area 6960 is not touched. Therefore, when the guide path distribution member 6923 is standing and not inclined, when the game ball is distributed from the distribution guide path 6980 to the normal area 6960, the game is distributed to the guide path distribution member 6923. It can be in a state where the sphere does not touch or is difficult to touch.

  Therefore, when the guide path distribution member 6923 is in the standing state, the game ball can touch the guide path distribution member 6923 and be tilted, and the situation where the game ball is guided to the probability variation area 6950 can be suppressed. Furthermore, the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the inclined state only for a short time such as the eleventh round when the time-reduced symbols 2 to 6 are displayed. For this reason, since the time for the game ball to contact the guide path distribution member 6923 is shortened, consumption of the guide path distribution member 6923 can be suppressed accordingly.

  Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the passing of the game ball with respect to the probability variation region 6970 which is not scheduled. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a large amount of damage that may occur in the game hall due to the transition to the probability-changing gaming state in an unscheduled state.

  In the above example, when the game ball that has entered the right grand prize winning opening 7000 is guided to the normal area 6960, the guide path distribution member 6923 is an area from the distribution guide path 6980 to the normal area 6960. Although the contact with the game ball is suppressed in the standing state in the area that is out of the range, when the game ball is guided to the normal area 6960 according to another aspect, the game ball with respect to the guide path distribution member 6923 in the normal area 6960 It is also possible to eliminate the contact. For example, when a game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 7000 is guided to the normal area 6960, the guide path distribution member 6923 is moved away from the area from the distribution guide path 6980 to the normal area 6960. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the probability variation area 6970, the game ball is brought into contact with the guide path distribution member 6923 by placing it at a position higher than the position where the guide path distribution member 6923 is disposed. It can be set as the aspect eradicated.

On the other hand, the width of the right winning prize opening 7000 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball and at least narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball, and is a width that suppresses the passage of a plurality of parallel game balls. ing. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls to be awarded to the right big prize opening 7000, and it is possible to suppress excessive payout of game balls.
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area (probability changing area 6970) when the right big winning opening 7000 is opened during the special game (big hit). Game profits (after a big hit, probability fluctuations for a certain number of fluctuations). When the right big prize opening opening / closing member 6933 is opened and the sorting device solenoid 6923 is activated to open the specific area for a sufficient period of time (long open state), the game ball rolling on the gently inclined portion 6504 is dropped into the drop guide path. 6506 can be entered and then passed through a specific area 6970 (see FIG. 152).

  On the other hand, when the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 is opened, but the operating period of the distribution device solenoid 6923 is short and the specific area is opened only for a very short time (short open state), the game ball rolls on the gently inclined portion 6504. Even if the player enters the fall guide path 6506, it can only pass through the normal area 6960 instead of the specific area 6970, so that the gaming profit (probability fluctuation) described above is not generated in the game after the big hit.

  Depending on how the ratio between the long open state and the short open state described above is set for the combination of the operation pattern of the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 and the operation pattern of the sorting device 6923, after the above-mentioned big hit game The degree of expectation for the probability variation game can be changed to a predetermined one. In the above-described gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 148, in the big hit based on the special symbol 1, the cooperative behavior between the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 and the distribution device solenoid 692 is in a short open state at a rate of almost half. On the other hand, in the jackpot based on the special symbol 2, the cooperative behavior of the right big prize opening / closing member 6933 and the distribution device 6923 is controlled to be in the long open state at all ratios. Therefore, the jackpot game based on the special symbol 2 is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot based on the special symbol 1.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a characteristic that a predetermined game profit can be obtained when the game ball passes through the specific area, and therefore, there is a possibility of the following problem. First, if the gaming ball does not pass through the specific area 6970 while the gaming machine is in the long open state as described above, the probability variation state does not occur after the big hit and the mere normal gaming state does not occur. It becomes a short time state. This is probably attributed to the situation on the player side, such as the launch of the game ball being interrupted despite the fact that the right prize opening is long open, but in rare cases, the ball is clogged, There may be a malfunction of the launcher. Secondly, the game ball passes through the specific area 6970 while the right big prize opening is only the short opening described above. This is likely due to fraud. However, in the conventional gaming machine, although there are such abnormalities as faults and frauds, abnormalities cannot be found, determined, discriminated, etc. in the game after the big hit. Therefore, the misunderstanding that the gaming profit that the player originally expected to have been gained could not be obtained, while the amusement hall operators also remained suspicious of fraud, and both There was a problem in making it progress smoothly.

  Therefore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment discovers, determines, evaluates, analyzes, etc. the degree and attributes of the big hit game every time of the big hit game, and confirms the result as history information, so that the player and the game hall Both management operators can now have an opportunity to confirm, evaluate, and judge the abnormalities such as obstacles and fraud described above. The gaming machine defines a plurality of types of parameters related to the attributes of the game, sets the values of each parameter from the actual jackpot game, records and records them, and sets the notification form based on the recorded information. After determining and creating, the history information is notified.

  Examples of parameters include: 1. Parameters related to the special symbol (parameter a), whether it is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 or a big hit based on the special symbol 2; 2. Parameter relating to jackpot type (parameter b), whether it is a big hit with the above-mentioned long open state (short time symbol 2-6 in FIG. 150) or a big hit with a short open state (short time symbol 1); 3. a first parameter (parameter c) relating to the game result, whether the game ball has passed or not passed through the specific area 6970 while being a big hit in the short open state; There is a second parameter (parameter d) relating to the game result indicating whether or not the game ball can pass through the specific area 6970 while being a big hit in the long open state.

The identification flag of each parameter is managed as follows using, for example, 2-bit information.
Parameter a: (0, 1) jackpot based on special symbol 1
(1,0) Big hit based on special symbol 2 Parameter b: (0, 1) Long open big hit
(1, 0) Short-open big hit Parameter c: (0, 1) No specific area passing when short open
(1, 0) Passing through specific area when short opening Parameter d: (0, 1) Passing through specific area when long opening
(1, 0) No specific area passing when long open

  The peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU 4150b) of the gaming machine sets these parameters based on a command from the main control board 4110 every time a big hit is made, and stores them in the RAM area (peripheral control RAM 4150c) in the form of a table or the like. Record cumulatively. FIG. 154 is a parameter management table recorded in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Records are added in order of jackpot (# 1 to #n: #n is the latest record) and the values of the parameters (a1, b1, c1, d1 to an, bn, cn, dn) created in each record are recorded. To do. RTC1 to RTCn are RTC date and time data created by the RTC control unit 4165 when each parameter is set. The upper limit number of records in the management table is preferably sufficient for at least one day operation of the game machine, and may be 99, for example. If records exceeding this number are recorded, the oldest record may be deleted, the subsequent records may be sequentially shifted, and the latest record may be recorded. Further, the gaming machine determines the notification mode of the history information based on the parameter management table and notifies (outputs) the history information.

  Next, parameter setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU 4150b) of the gaming machine recognizes the processing flag “3” (FIG. 92) based on the command from the main control board 4100, the flowchart of FIG. 155 is started. First, the peripheral control board 4140 (4150a) determines whether or not the big hit is based on the first special symbol based on the command (S12400). As a basis, “1” is set to the first bit of the parameter a (S12440). If the determination is affirmative, “1” is set to the second bit of the parameter a (S12420).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4140 determines the type of jackpot (S12460). Since the jackpot type is included in a part of the command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether the jackpot type is the big hit including the long open state described above or the big hit including the short open state. Is determined. If the latter is determined, “1” is set to the first bit of the parameter b (S12480). On the other hand, if the jackpot type is determined to be a jackpot including a long open state (S12460), "1" is set to the second bit of parameter b (S12500).

  When the peripheral control board 4140 sets “1” to the first bit of the parameter b, information on the flag (V flag) related to the passing state of the game ball in the specific area 6970 based on the command from the main control board 4100 Is checked (S12520). When the main control MPU 4100a receives an ON signal accompanying the passage of the specific area 6770 that passes the game ball from the probability variation area sensor 6992, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” in the V flag area of the RAM. If the peripheral control board 4140 does not detect the V flag “1” based on a command from the main control board 4100, whether or not the big hit game has ended (whether the final round of opening the big prize opening has been accommodated) (S12560). If this is affirmed, “1” is set to the second bit of the parameter c (S12580). If it is determined that the big hit game is ongoing, the V flag check is repeated. When the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the V flag is “1”, it sets “1” to the first bit of the parameter c (S12540). When the setting of the parameter c is completed, the peripheral control board 4140 registers the values of the parameters a, b, c, and d together with the RTC information at that time in the management table (FIG. 154) described above (S12680). Each of a, b, c, and d is reset to (0, 0) (S12700).

  If the peripheral control board 4140 determines in S12460 that the jackpot type is a jackpot in the long open state, it sets “1” to the second bit of the parameter b (S12500). Next, the V flag data is checked (S12600), and if it is determined that “1” is set in the V flag, “1” is set in the second bit of the parameter d (S12620). On the other hand, if it is determined in S12600 that “1” is not set in the V flag, it is determined whether or not the big hit game has ended (S12640). If it is determined that the big hit game is continuing, the V flag check is continued. If it is determined that the big hit game has ended, “1” is set to the first bit of the parameter d (S12660). When the setting of the parameter d is completed, the peripheral control board 4140 registers the values of the parameters a, b, c, d together with the RTC information at that time in the above-described table (S12680), and then the parameters a, b, c, Each of d is reset to (0, 0) (S12700). Thus, the peripheral control board 4140 ends the parameter setting process. Note that when the value of the parameter c is set, the value of the parameter d is not set.

According to the parameter setting flowchart described above, when the big hit is based on the special symbol 1 and the big hit type is a short hit in the short open state, and a game ball enters the specific area 6970, the parameter is: Is set as follows.
Parameter a: (0, 1)
Parameter b: (1, 0)
Parameter c: (1, 0)
Parameter d: (0, 0)

On the other hand, when the big hit is based on the special symbol 1 and the big hit type is the big hit in the short open state, and a game ball enters the specific area 6970, the parameters are set as follows.
Parameter a: (0, 1)
Parameter b: (1, 0)
Parameter c: (1, 0)
Parameter d: (0, 0)

  From the combination of these parameters, the peripheral control board 4140 later determines a game history in which a game ball has entered the specific area 6970 while the big hit type is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 and the big hit type is a short open state. be able to. This state is suspected to be caused by some illegal game.

Next, when the big hit is based on the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and the big hit type is the big hit in the long open state, and a game ball enters the specific area 6970, the parameters are as follows.
Parameter a: (0, 1) or (1, 0)
Parameter b: (0, 1)
Parameter c: (0, 0)
Parameter d: (0, 1)

On the other hand, when the big hit is based on the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and the big hit type is a long open big hit, and the game ball does not enter the specific area 6970, the parameters are set as follows: Is done.
Parameter a: (0, 1) or (1, 0)
Parameter b: (0, 1)
Parameter c: (0, 0)
Parameter d: (1, 0)

  From the combination of these parameters, the peripheral control board 4140 is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and the big hit type is a big hit in the long open state, but the game ball could not enter the specific area 6970. The game history can be determined later. This state occurs for reasons other than fraud such as interruption of game ball launch.

  Next, the gaming machine sets (selects) a notification form of history information based on the parameter management table (FIG. 154). As the notification of history information, for example, output by display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, output by display on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, output by sound from the various speakers described above, Output by light through a lamp, output by display on the information display device 1400A managed by the peripheral control board 4140 and shared among a plurality of types of game boards, or output using an accessory, or a combination thereof Can be illustrated. If the main control board 4100 executes various processes of the peripheral control board 4140, history information can be output from the main control board 4100 to the hall computer via the external terminal board. In this embodiment, notification by display on the information display device 1400A is exemplified.

  As will be described later, a series of processes leading to the output of history information includes a game history information notification form setting process (FIG. 156), a game history information notification execution process (FIG. 157), and a game history information list notification process (FIG. 163). In this embodiment, it is executed at the end of the jackpot game. First, the game history information notification form setting process will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 starts the game history information notification form setting process when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, “end of jackpot game” is set as one of the “start conditions”, and when the jackpot game ends, the game is based on the parameters a to d set for the ended jackpot game. The history information notification form setting process is started. First, the peripheral control board 4140 reads all records in the parameter management table (FIG. 154) (S13000). Next, standard notification form setting processing is executed (S13020). The standard notification form setting process is a process for setting / selecting a notification form of history information regarding the latest jackpot based on parameters (an, bn, cn, dn) related to the latest record. In the standard notification form selection process, each parameter is processed as follows.

Parameter a
(0, 1): Big hit based on the first special symbol ← Pattern 1 is set (1,0): Big hit based on the second special symbol ← Pattern 2 is set Parameter b
(0, 1): Big hit in long open state ← Set pattern I (1,0): Big hit in short open state ← Set pattern II Parameter c
(1, 0): A ball hits a specific area at the time of a big hit in a short open release state ← pattern a is set (0, 1): No ball hits the specific area at a big hit in a short open release state ← Pattern b is set Parameter d
(1, 0): No entry into specific area at big hit in long open release state ← Set pattern A (0,1): There is a ball into specific area at big hit in long open release state ← Set pattern B

  The peripheral control board 4140 stores the selected / set pattern data in a predetermined area of the RAM (peripheral control SRAM 4150d). Next, the peripheral control board 4140 analyzes all the records in the parameter management table and determines whether or not an abnormality notification form is necessary as a history information notification form (S13040). As stated above, “There is a ball entering a specific area at the time of a big hit in a short open release state” and “No ball entry into a specific area at the time of a big hit in a long open release state”, the constant fluctuation after the big hit ends. This is a result of some abnormal state in the process of the game ball entering the specific area 6970 due to the generation of the game profit that brings the jackpot winning probability to the high probability state. If such abnormalities occur continuously, there is a high possibility that the game is proceeding with fraud or malfunctions occurring. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 analyzes all the records of the parameter management table, analyzes the frequency of parameters related to “abnormality”, the ratio to all recorded data, etc., and adds the abnormality notification form to the standard notification form. Determine whether or not. Instead of the standard notification form, only the abnormality notification form may be output. In the peripheral control board 4140, the abnormality related to the parameter c (at the time of the big hit in the short open release state) and the abnormality related to the parameter d (at the time of the big hit in the long open release state) are different from each other as described above. For this reason, the parameter c and the parameter d are usually determined while being distinguished from each other.

  For example, when the record (cn) of the parameter c related to the latest jackpot and the record (cn-1) related to the previous jackpot are both (1, 0), it is a bonus in the short open state. However, since there are two consecutive hits in the specific area, there is a high possibility that the game is progressing with some injustice or malfunction. Similarly, when the record (dn) of the parameter d related to the latest jackpot and the record (dn-1) related to the previous jackpot are both (1, 0), the jackpot in the long release state is released. It was assumed that the player was unable to understand the content of the game because the player was unable to understand the content of the game because the player was unable to enter the specific area at the same time, but the launch of the game ball was interrupted. The As described above, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that it is necessary to notify the history information in a mode indicating “continuous abnormality” when the same type of abnormality continues. Note that it may be determined whether the abnormality is comparable to the continuous abnormality by comparing the cumulative number of occurrences of the parameter value indicating abnormality, the occurrence frequency, and the like with a predetermined specified value. In addition, even if it is not “continuous”, it is possible to determine that one incorrect data is “abnormal”.

  If the determination in S13040 is affirmative, the peripheral control board 4140 executes abnormality notification form setting processing (S13060). In this process, it is selected and set in what form the history information is reported in a form representing “continuous abnormality”. The peripheral control board 4140 records the set form in a predetermined area of the RAM, performs a history information list creation process S13080 (described later), and ends the game history information notification form setting process.

・ Parameter a
(1, 0): Big hit based on the first special symbol (Pattern 1): Blue background is displayed on the symbol display device (0, 1): Big hit based on the second special symbol (Pattern 2): Red background on the symbol display device Is displayed / parameter b
(1,0): Big hit in the long open state (Pattern I): Gold background is displayed on the symbol display device (0, 1): Big hit in the short open state (Pattern II): Silver background is displayed on the symbol display device c
(1,0): There is a ball entering a specific area at the time of a big hit in the short release state (pattern a): An abnormality identification symbol (u) is displayed over the color background (0, 1): A big hit in the short release state Sometimes there is no entry into a specific area (pattern b): no particular (abnormality identification symbols (u) (m) are not displayed)
Parameter d
(1,0): There is no entry into a specific area at the time of big hit in the long open release state (Pattern A): An abnormality identification symbol (m) is displayed over the color background (0, 1): Big hit in the long open release state Sometimes there is a ball in a specific area (Pattern B): Nothing in particular (abnormality identification symbols (u) (m) are not displayed)
FIG. 158 is an example of a form in which the abnormality identification symbol (u) or (m) is displayed on the screen of the symbol display device 1400A over the color background.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4140 refers to the corresponding area of the RAM and checks whether there is setting data for the abnormality notification form (S14040). When the setting data of the abnormality notification form is confirmed, an additional notification form for creating history information of a mode representing “continuous abnormality” is created based on the abnormality notification form data, and the combination of the additional notification form and the standard notification form is integrated. Create a notification form. When there is no abnormal notification form data, an integrated notification form combining the additional notification form and the standard notification form is not created. With the integrated notification form created in this way, it is possible to notify history information in a form representing “continuous abnormality”. Based on the additional notification form, the peripheral control board 4140 executes, for example, an emphasis process for the standard notification form and an additional process such as a decoration process to create an integrated notification form. For example, when the additional notification form is “blinking display of image”, the integrated notification form that does not have the additional notification form becomes “always displaying standard display form (lit display)” and has the additional notification form. The integrated notification mode is “blinking display of standard notification mode”. As the additional notification form, it is possible to change the shape of the standard notification form or to add another form to the standard notification form. Moreover, it is good also as providing the additional alerting | reporting form according to the extent of generation | occurrence | production of abnormality, such as the accumulation number and frequency of abnormal data. For example, as an additional notification form, a “flashing display of an image with a long flashing interval (for example, flashing every second)” and a “flashing display of an image with a short flashing interval (for example, flashing every 0.5 seconds)” are provided. When the cumulative number of data is one, no additional notification form is added, and when the cumulative number of abnormal data is two, “blinking display of images with a long blinking interval (for example, blinking every second) "Is added as an additional notification form, and when the cumulative number of abnormal data is 3 or more," flashing display of an image with a short blinking interval (for example, blinking every 0.5 seconds) "is added as an additional notification form. Etc. can be illustrated.

  Then, the peripheral control board 4140 performs notification in the created form (S14060) and ends the flowchart. In this embodiment, the history information notification termination condition is “the next jackpot game is to be started”. That is, in the present embodiment, the history information notification period is “all game periods from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game (in other words, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). During the display and stop display, during the waiting period until passing through the valid gate 6010n, during the demonstration period, and during the error period), until the next jackpot game is executed. Regardless of the progress of the game, the same history information can be continuously displayed. With this history information, it is possible to confirm and discriminate at any time from the outside without interfering with the progress of the game whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the progress of the jackpot that ended most recently, and it is possible to leave evidence of them. . As a result, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud early, to detect abnormalities such as launches early, or to deal with disadvantages received by the player, etc. It is possible to suppress (provide a sense of security) to give disadvantage and distrust to both companies.

  Further, the notification period of the history information may be as follows. For example, the notification period of the history information may be “from when the short-time game after the big hit ends until the next big hit starts” or “when the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability state, Until the next big hit is started ”,“ when the gaming state after the big hit is a high probability state, after changing to the normal gaming state until the next big hit is started ”,“ A predetermined period (10 minutes after the start of the display start operation, the first special symbol, the first special symbol, the first of the display start operation (such as an operation on a display start switch (not shown) provided on the back of the gaming machine) is performed by the operator. The notification may be executed, for example, “until the end of 10 variable displays of 2 special symbols”.

  The manner of notifying the game history information on the information display device 1400A or the like is different from the display manner of the fourth symbol displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. The 4th symbol is displayed smaller than the above-mentioned decorative symbol, and is a symbol that is variably displayed based on each of the lottery based on the first starting port and the lottery based on the second starting port. The winning or losing is displayed with “O”, “X”, etc. On the other hand, even if the lottery based on the first starting port and the lottery based on the second starting port are performed after the end of the jackpot game, the history information described above is not substantially affected by these, The output (history information) regarding the operation mode of the game ball for the specific area is maintained and continued. If the history information is executed in the information display device 1400A, which is a member different from the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1400, the history information can be transmitted and recognized to the outside clearly distinct from the fourth symbol.

  Further, the notification period of history information may be changed according to the type of parameter. For example, the history information notification regarding the parameters c and d is executed regardless of the progress of the game during the entire game period from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot is started. The history information regarding a and b is notified for a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (10 minutes after the display start operation is performed, the end of 10 variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, etc.) Etc.) can be exemplified in the period until the elapse of). Since the peripheral control board 4140 updates the history information every time a big hit, the player and the game hall operating company can check the latest history information. Accordingly, the game hall operating company uses the history information to determine whether the game profit is based on an abnormal state where there is a risk of fraud such as a game ball entering the specific area 6770 even though the jackpot is in a short open state. The game profit is based on an abnormal state caused by an erroneous operation on the player side, such as a game ball could not be entered into the specific area 6770 even though the big hit was in a long open state. It is possible to easily and surely determine whether it was not obtained.

  Also, if the game ball passes through the specific area 6970, if the game ball continues to be right-handed until the specified number of fluctuations is reached after the big hit, the game ball will enter the first start port 2003. However, if the game ball enters the first starting port by left-handed and wins the short-open big hit, the gaming state after the big hit ends becomes a low probability state. Even if the player misunderstands that the high probability state of the obtained kite is lost, the game hall operator can explain this misunderstanding to the player carefully based on the history information.

  Next, the history information list creation process (S13080) described above will be described. The standard notification form and abnormality notification form described above are performed for the most recent jackpot game history, but the history information list is created as detailed history information including game history related to a plurality of past jackpots. Is done. The form of the history information list includes a form including history information related to all the big hits in the past and a form including only history information related to the big hits described above. FIG. 160 shows the former form, and FIGS. 161 and 162 show the latter form. In the history information list, a game ball passed through a specific area 6970, which distinguishes whether a big hit based on the first special symbol (per special 1) or a big hit based on the second special symbol (per special 2) (with V winning) ) Or an area that distinguishes whether the game ball has not passed through the specific area 6970 (no V winning), or an item that distinguishes between a short open big hit (V short open) or a long open big hit (V long open) And real-time data of RTC is included, for example.

  Peripheral control board 4140 determines the list format of history information according to a predetermined policy, creates a history information list based on the parameter management table (FIG. 154), and records this in a predetermined area of RAM. In addition, in FIG. 162, when the game ball passes the specific area 6770 even though it is a short hit big hit, one or more big hits based on the second special symbol following that are illegal acts as described above. These jackpots are treated as abnormal because they are likely to be caused.

  The peripheral control board 4140 executes the history information list notification process according to the flowchart of FIG. This flowchart is started based on, for example, timer interrupt processing. The peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not there is history information list data in the RAM (S15000), and if affirmed, the demonstration period (enters the customer waiting state and is demonstrated by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400). It is determined whether it is within a certain period (S15020)). If the determination is affirmative, a history information list is notified (S15060). The history information list notification is executed by being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device or the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. If it is not during the demonstration period, it is determined whether or not a notification request has been made (S15040), and even when this is affirmed, the history information list is notified (S15060). The notification request can be set by executing a predetermined operation on the menu displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device or the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. The peripheral control board 4140 can continue to notify the history information list until the demonstration screen display ends or until the notification request for the history information list is ended. By notifying the history information list, both the player and the game hall operating company can easily confirm the history of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm / determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in a plurality of jackpot progressions executed in the past, and it is possible to leave evidence of them. As a result, it is possible to discover the possibility of fraud, discover abnormalities such as launches, or deal with the disadvantages received by players, and both players and playground operators It is possible to suppress (provide a sense of security) to give a disadvantage or distrust to a person.

  In addition, as described above, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 159, it is also possible to notify history information using a drivable rotating accessory, instead of notifying history information on the information display device 1400 </ b> A. In this embodiment, the three rotating objects (1) to (3) arranged in the left-right direction are provided in a predetermined area of the game board so that they can be visually recognized from the outside. The 1st rotation object (1) located on the leftmost side is related to the parameter a, and has a “red background part” and a “blue background part” on the outer peripheral surface, and is rotated. It is possible to switch between “red background part” and “blue background part”, and by stopping, one of “red background part” and “blue background part” can be seen from the outside. Display as follows. In addition, the second rotation accessory (2) located in the middle relates to the parameter b, and has a “gold background part” and a “silver background part” on the outer peripheral surface, and rotates. It is possible to switch between the “gold background part” and the “silver background part” by stopping, and by stopping, one of the “gold background part” and the “silver background part” can be visually recognized from the outside. To be displayed. In addition, the third rotation object (3) located on the rightmost side relates to the parameters c and d, and “the part where the identification symbol u is described” and “the identification symbol m are described on the outer peripheral surface. ”,“ Parts where both identification symbols are not described (parts that are not in an abnormal state) ”, and by rotating, these parts can be switched, and by stopping, Either part is displayed so as to be visible from the outside. The peripheral control board 4140 controls the rotation and stop of the three rotating actors based on the above-described parameters, and notifies the history information related to the previous jackpot by combining the stopping modes of the three rotating actors. Make it possible. Further, in such a notification form using the rotating combination, even if the power is cut off or the RAM is cleared, the initialization operation for returning each rotating combination to the initial position is not performed. Good. In this way, even if a backup or the like is not mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the history information related to the previous jackpot can be reliably maintained even if the power is cut off or the RAM is cleared. .

  Further, instead of reporting the history information on the information display device 1400A, the history information may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. In this case, in order to clarify the distinction from the above-described 4th symbol, the display area where the 4th symbol is displayed (for example, the display area in the upper right corner of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400) is different. The history information is preferably displayed in the display area (for example, the display area in the lower left corner of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400). Further, instead of reporting the history information on the information display device 1400A, a predetermined LED lamp or the like is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the progress state of the game (emission color varies depending on the combination of the parameters a to d described above). You may make it alert | report historical information by.

  Note that when a game ball passes through the specific area 6970, the present invention is applied to a type of gaming machine in which the gaming state is set to a high probability state until the specified variation number is reached after the end of the big hit game. As described above, the present invention may be applied to a type of gaming machine in which the gaming state is set to a high probability state until the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game ends. In this type of gaming machine, it is only necessary to balance the expected gaming profits by making the ratio of the jackpot in the short open state to the jackpot larger than that of the former gaming machine.

  Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machine, the high probability state end trigger after the end of the jackpot game was a specified number of changes, but each time a big hit lottery, the high probability state falls to a low probability state. The present invention may be applied to a type of gaming machine that performs a lottery and ends a high probability state when a falling lottery is won. In the case of this type of gaming machine, history information may be continuously displayed until the next jackpot is started even after winning the falling lottery.

  Even in a type of gaming machine that establishes a jackpot gaming condition device when a game ball passes a specific area, the present invention is applied so that the history information of the operation form of the game ball for the specific area is notified. May be. This gaming machine, for example, performs a lottery lottery based on the entrance of game balls into the first starting port and the second starting port, and if the winning unit is won, the big winning port is opened with a low number of rounds. In the meantime, it is known as a so-called type two-type mixer that generates a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment may have the following configuration. That is, when the main control board 4100 determines that “1” is set in the above-described V flag at the end of the round using the right big prize opening 7000 in the short-open big jackpot, the illegal game The necessary information may be output to the hall computer during the big hit game via the above-described external terminal version as the game detection information according to the above. “A game similar to an illegal game” is classified as a game that has a high possibility of being based on an illegal game operation, although it cannot be determined as an illegal game that can be detected by a magnetic sensor or the like. Therefore, the hall computer can perform necessary notification to the game hall management manager in a form distinguished from “illegal game” as “game equivalent to illegal game”. Further, when the main control board 4100 determines that “1” is set to the above-described V flag at the end of the round using the right big winning opening 7000 in the big hit in the short open state, the peripheral control is performed. When a notification display command related to “game conforming to fraudulent game” is transmitted to the board 4140 and the peripheral control board receives the command, a notification specialized for “game conforming to fraudulent game” is received during or after the big hit game. Can be executed. Further, when the main control board 4100 determines that “1” is not set in the above-described V flag at the end of the round using the right big winning opening 7000 in the long open big hit as described above, As the “player support request” information, the necessary information is output to the hall computer during the jackpot game through the external terminal version described above. “Player support request” is a long open state big hit, but in a state where the V flag “1” is not established, there is a possibility that the player may have made a mistake in the game operation at the big hit. This is the information you want. Therefore, the hall computer can make a notice for a necessary attention to the game hall management manager based on the “player support request”. Further, when the main control board 4100 determines that “1” is not set in the above-described V flag at the end of the round using the right big winning opening 7000 in the long open big hit as described above, When a notification display command related to “player support request” is transmitted to the control board 4140 and the peripheral control board receives the command, a notification specializing in “player support request”, for example, jackpot after the jackpot game ends. During the game, it is possible to execute a notification indicating that the right strike must be continued.

  Note that in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is the same as an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player. This is a kind of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 200 Dish unit 201 Upper plate (storage part)
210 Plate unit base 212 Upper plate body (reservoir)
212a Guidance passage section 220 Production operation unit 220A Mounting base unit 220B Touch unit 220C Button unit 244 Upper plate liquid crystal display device (image display device)
246 Touch Panel 257 Top Plate Production Button (Press Button)
260 Tray unit cover (bulging member)
261 Lower dish opening 262 Upper dish lower covering part

Claims (1)

A lottery is performed based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, and when the result of the lottery is a predetermined result, control is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. And a gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined gaming profit when the game medium passes a specific area in the special gaming state,
Special gaming state control means capable of controlling the special gaming state in a plurality of modes with different possibilities of passing game media through the specific area;
Peripheral control means for performing predetermined presentation control when a predetermined condition is established in the special gaming state;
With
The special gaming state control means controls the special gaming state in a difficult-to-pass manner in which a gaming medium is unlikely to pass through the specific area, and facilitates passage through which the gaming medium is likely to pass through the specific area. And controlling the special gaming state in an aspect,
When a lottery based on the game medium passing through the first start area of the start area is performed, the lottery based on the game medium passing through the second start area of the start area It is more likely that the special gaming state can be controlled in the difficult passage mode by the special gaming state control means than in the case where the special gaming state is performed, and the special gaming state can be controlled in the easy passage mode. Is low,
The specific period during which the game medium can pass through the specific area is set to a predetermined intermediate period excluding the start and end of the period controlled to the special gaming state,
The peripheral control means includes
When the game medium passes through the specific area in the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the difficult passage mode, the specific in the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the easy passage mode The first abnormality notification control for notifying the passage of the specific area in the first mode that is not performed when the game medium passes through the area is started based on the fact that the condition for starting the notification is satisfied,
In the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the easy passage mode when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the midway period of the special gaming state controlled in the easy passage mode The second abnormality notification control for notifying the non-passage of the specific area in the second mode that is not performed when the game medium passes through the specific area and that can be distinguished from the first mode, satisfies the condition for starting the notification. Start with
While performing the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control, a lottery based on the passing of the game medium through the first starting area, or the gaming medium has passed through the second starting area. The special game state is newly controlled in the difficult passage mode or the easy passage mode while performing the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control as well as when a lottery based on the situation is performed. Even if it is a case, it is possible to continue to perform the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control being executed, and the identification of the newly controlled special gaming state in the midway period Even if a result regarding whether or not the game medium passes through the area is obtained and a new abnormality is specified based on the result, the first abnormality notification control or the second abnormality notification control being executed is cleared. Gaming machine, characterized in that to leave without.